JP2009089803A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which enables the accurate detection of abnormal winning of prizes in any of game states. <P>SOLUTION: A CPU 56 sets the threshold value (for example, 3) onto an abnormal prize winning determination counter when the power source is closed, the threshold value (for example, 5 or 10) when the game state is shifted to a minor win, the threshold value (for example, 192) when the game state is shifted to 16 rounds of the first jackpot, the threshold value (36, 84 or 132) when the game state is shifted to 3 rounds, 7 rounds or 11 rounds of the second jackpot. The CPU 56 decrements the values of the abnormal prize winning determination counter by 1 as each game ball wins the major prize winning slot (first or second major prize winning slot). When the value of the abnormal prize winning determination counter is down to zero, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning of prizes occurs and carries out a processing for executing an abnormality alarm. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2009,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention is capable of performing a predetermined game using a game ball, and a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition About.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball is won in a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. In addition, a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “variation”) are provided, and the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result in any of the plurality of variable display units. In some cases, a gaming state (a state of the gaming machine, more specifically, a state in which the gaming machine is controlled) is configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display unit based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. Note that the derivation display is to stop and display a symbol (excluding so-called stop before re-variation). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state in which a hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be called a round.

  Further, in the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) are continuously stopped for a predetermined time, and are stopped, swung, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  By the way, due to a malfunction of a gaming machine (for example, a big prize opening) or an illegal act, there is a case where a game ball wins the big prize opening and the payout of the prize ball is performed at a timing when the big prize opening is not opened. In this case, excessive prize balls are paid out, which is disadvantageous to the game store. In order to prevent such a situation, in Patent Document 1, when a predetermined number of game balls have won a prize winning gate after a lapse of a predetermined time since the closing of the prize winning opening, it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred and an abnormality is notified. A gaming machine configured to execute has been proposed.

JP-A-5-228243 (see paragraphs 0125-0135, FIG. 29, and FIG. 30)

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 as described above, whether or not the game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the abnormality determination process for the big prize opening which is the same process is executed even when the game state is not changed to the big hit gaming state To do. Here, when the game state is shifted to the big hit game state, a predetermined number (for example, 10) or more game balls may win in each opening (each round) of the big prize opening, whereas the big hit game state When it is not shifted to, winning in the big winning mouth should not naturally occur. For this reason, it is necessary to set a larger number of winnings in the determination of the abnormal winning when the game is shifted to the jackpot gaming state than when the game is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state. However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is configured to perform the abnormality determination of the big prize opening in the same process, there is a possibility that an abnormal winning cannot be detected.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately detecting and determining an abnormal winning in any gaming state.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can play a predetermined game using a game ball, and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, determined as “big hit” or “small hit” in the big hit determination of step S62). ) Based on the above (for example, a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state (starting operation state)), and the first transition condition is satisfied (for example, the big hit in step S62). A first variable winning ball apparatus (for example, a first big winning opening, that is, a game game ball that can be changed between a closed state in which the game ball does not win and an open state in which the game ball can be won based on the determination) The game ball can be won in a closed state where the game ball does not win based on the establishment of the second transition condition (for example, it was determined as “small win” in the big hit determination in step S62). When the second variable winning ball device (for example, the second large winning opening, that is, the variable winning ball device 20) that can be changed to the open state and the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device execute the opening operation. (For example, when the second big prize opening performs the opening operation in the small hit gaming state, when the first big winning opening performs the opening operation in the first big hit gaming state, or in the second big winning gaming state, the second big winning opening Threshold value used for notifying the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device that executes the opening operation (for example, in the case of a small hit gaming state) A value indicating 5 or 10; a value indicating 192 in the case of the first big hit game state of 16 rounds; a value indicating 36 in the case of the second big hit game state of 3 rounds; a value indicating 36 in the case of the second big hit game state of 7 rounds State Threshold storage means for storing a value indicating 84, or a value indicating 132 in the case of the second big hit game state of 11 rounds (for example, a part for executing steps S412 and S474 in the game control microcomputer 560) A first detection means (for example, a count switch 23) for detecting a game ball won in the first variable winning ball device and outputting a first detection signal; and detecting a gaming ball won in the second variable winning ball device The first detection signal is output from the second detection means (for example, the prize winning switches 71a to 73a) for outputting the second detection signal and the first detection means during the opening operation of the first variable winning ball apparatus. First winning number measuring means for measuring the number of winnings to the first variable winning ball device based on the result (for example, steps S489B and S5 in the game control microcomputer 560) 14 and S533) and the number of winnings to the second variable winning ball device based on the output of the second detection signal from the second detecting means during the opening operation of the second variable winning ball device. The second winning number measuring means (for example, the part for executing step S490 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the first variable winning ball device and the second variable winning ball device are both performing the opening operation. In the normal game state (for example, a game state other than the big hit game state / small hit game state; specifically, the state in which the processes of steps S300 to S303 in the special symbol normal process are executed) Based on the output of the first detection signal or the second detection signal from the detection means, the normal abnormal winning determination means (for example, the game control my In the local computer 560, a process (step S588) for determining that an abnormal prize has occurred in the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening based on the fact that the result of step S586 becomes Y when N in step S585. And the number of winnings measured by the first winning number measuring means during execution of the opening operation of the first variable winning ball device is used to notify an abnormal winning to the first variable winning ball device. The number of winnings measured by the second winning number measuring means during execution of the opening operation of the second variable winning ball device is used to notify the abnormal winning to the second variable winning ball device. Specific abnormal winning determination means for determining an abnormal winning based on exceeding the second threshold value (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, a difference occurs when Y in step S585). The process for determining whether or not the value of the winning determination counter is 0 (step S588) and the case where the abnormal winning determination is determined by the normal abnormal winning determination means or the specific abnormal winning determination means (for example, in step S588) Y) abnormality notification execution means for executing abnormality notification (for example, a part for executing the process of step S589 in the game control microcomputer 560 and a part for executing the process of step S707 in the effect control microcomputer 100). The threshold storage means includes a standard value for winning the first variable winning ball device in the opening operation of the first variable winning ball device (for example, in the case of the first big hit gaming state of 16 rounds, The standard value is 160 (10 x 16) because 10 rounds are awarded to the 1st grand prize opening and the next round is entered. The first threshold value (for example, a value indicating 192 in the case of the 16th round of the first big hit gaming state) is stored, and the first variable in the opening operation of the second variable winning ball apparatus is stored. 2 Standard value of winning a prize to the variable winning ball device (in the case of a small hit game state, the standard value is 1 when assuming that an average of 1 game ball per opening is awarded to the 2nd big winning opening ( A value indicating 1 (when the number of times an object has been released) or 2 (when the number of times an object has been released is 2). When the game is in the second big hit game state of 3 rounds, 7 rounds or 11 rounds, The standard value is 30 (10 x 3 rounds), 70 (10 x 7 rounds), or 110 (10 rounds), respectively, because the ball moves to the next round if 10 balls win the 2nd big prize opening. X11 round) is a value greater than Indicates a second threshold value different from the first threshold value (for example, 5 (when the number of times an object is released is 1) or 10 (when the number of times an object is released is 2) in the small hit gaming state Value of 36 for the second big hit game state of 3 rounds, a value of 84 for the second big hit game state of 7 rounds, 132 for the second big hit game state of 11 rounds (Value to be indicated) is stored.

  An abnormal state determination means (for example, a magnetic sensor 95a in the game control microcomputer 560) that determines whether or not a predetermined abnormal state (for example, a magnetic abnormality, a vibration abnormality, or an abnormal release) that is different from the abnormal winning in the gaming machine has occurred. ˜95f, a portion that executes processing for recognizing that an abnormal state has occurred based on input of detection signals from the vibration sensor 96a and the door opening sensor (not shown), and abnormal winning determination by the abnormal winning determination means (For example, Y in step S588) or the abnormal state determination means determines that a predetermined abnormal state has occurred (for example, magnetic sensors 95a to 95f, vibration sensor 96a, door open sensor (not shown)). Based on the detection signal from the external device) (for example, a hall External output means for outputting a predetermined abnormality signal (for example, the abnormality signal shown in FIG. 61) to the computer) (for example, a part for executing steps S1040 to S1047 in the game control microcomputer 560), and external output means Is a common output terminal (provided in the gaming machine) when the abnormal winning determination means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred and when the abnormal condition determining means determines that a predetermined abnormal condition has occurred. For example, a predetermined abnormality signal may be output to a single connector of the information terminal board 34 (see FIG. 52).

  Based on the fact that the game ball has won a special area (for example, the specific area 66) among the winning areas provided in the second variable winning ball apparatus (for example, the second large winning opening, that is, the variable winning ball apparatus 20). A gaming machine that shifts to an advantageous specific gaming state (for example, transitions to a second big hit gaming state), wherein the second variable winning ball device is in a closed state and an opened state during the opening operation of the second variable winning ball device. 2nd variable winning ball apparatus control means (for example, the part which performs step S414, S432, S436, S477, S498, S518A in the game control microcomputer 560) for executing the control to change to the second variable winning prize The ball device control means has a plurality of types of opening patterns (for example, a pattern indicating the number of opening times and opening times of the second big winning opening during the small hit game, the second big Type of the second transition condition established (for example, in the small hit game, the second big prize opening is opened once or twice). Alternatively, the second variable winning ball apparatus is changed between a closed state and an open state based on an open pattern corresponding to 3 rounds, 7 rounds, or 11 rounds in the second big hit game state, and the threshold value storage means Different second threshold values are stored according to (for example, a value indicating 5 or 10 is set in step S412, or a value indicating 36, 84 or 132 is set in step S474). It may be configured.

  After the first execution condition for variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball has won the first start winning opening 11 or the second start winning opening 12), the start condition for variable display is satisfied (for example, variable display of symbols) First variable display means (for example, FIG. 104) that starts variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) based on not the big hit game or the small hit game) and derives and displays the display result. 1) and the second execution condition for variable display are satisfied (for example, a game ball has won the third start winning opening 13), and the start condition for variable display is satisfied (for example, The second variable display means for starting the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) based on the fact that the symbol is not being variablely displayed but not being a big hit game or a small hit game) and deriving and displaying the display result. (For example, FIG. A second special symbol display 8b) and display result determining means for determining the display results of the first variable display means and the second variable display means based on the establishment of the variable display start condition (for example, a game control microcomputer) 560 and the first variable display means or the second variable display means, and the open display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display means or the second variable display means, the second variable winning ball apparatus is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). ) Starting operation control means (for example, a part for executing step S411 in the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the starting operation state to be in an open state, and the starting operation control means includes the first variable display means in the first variable display means. When the first open display result (for example, the small hit symbol of the first special symbol shown in FIG. 105A) is derived and displayed as the identification information display result First start operation control means (for example, a game control micro) that shifts to a first start operation state (for example, a start operation state in which an accessory is released once or twice) in which the second variable winning ball apparatus is in an open state a predetermined number of times. In the computer 560, a part for executing the process of setting 1 or 2 in the accessory release number counter in step S411), and a second opening display result (for example, FIG. When the small special symbol of the second special symbol shown in 105 (B) is derived and displayed, the second starting operation state (for example, the accessory is performed twice or three times) that is more advantageous to the player than the first starting operation state. In the second starting operation control means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560), 2 or 3 is set in the accessory release number counter in step S411. A portion for executing the setting process).

  The threshold value storage means stores a threshold value (for example, a value indicating three) used for notifying abnormal winning to the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device in a normal gaming state (for example, a normal state). (For example, the part that executes steps S46, S469, and S542 in the game control microcomputer 560), the winning number measurement means is the first detection signal or second from the first detection means or the second detection means even in the normal gaming state. Based on the output of the detection signal, the number of winnings in the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device is measured (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560, based on Y in step S586, step S587). ), The normal abnormal winning determination means is the winning measured by the winning number measuring means in the normal gaming state. Is determined to be an abnormal winning based on exceeding a threshold used to notify an abnormal winning to the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device in a normal gaming state (for example, a microcomputer for game control) When 560 is N in step S585, a process for determining whether or not the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is 0 (step S588), the threshold value storage means is a threshold value in the specific gaming state (for example, 5 10, 36, 84, 132, or 192) and a normal game state threshold value (for example, a value indicating 3) are stored in a common area (for example, an abnormality provided in the RAM 55). (A winning determination counter) may be stored.

  The abnormality notification execution means is determined to be abnormal winning by the normal abnormal winning determination means (for example, N in step S585 and Y in step S588) and when it is determined to be abnormal winning by the specific abnormal winning determination means (for example, A common abnormality notification (for example, a common abnormality winning notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9, a common sound output from the speaker 27, a lamp / (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes the process of step S707 based on the reception of a common abnormal winning notification designation command). It may be.

  The abnormality notification execution means is determined to be abnormal winning by the normal abnormal winning determination means (for example, N in step S585 and Y in step S588) and when it is determined to be abnormal winning by the specific abnormal winning determination means (for example, The abnormality notification is executed in a different manner between Y in step S585 and Y in step S588 (for example, based on the reception of the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command or abnormal winning notification 2 designation command by the production control microcomputer 100). The notification control process shown in FIG. 89 is executed).

  The threshold value in the normal gaming state is preferably at least 2 or more (for example, 3 in the first embodiment).

  The first execution condition of variable display is satisfied (for example, the first start winning port 11; however, any two of the first start winning ports 11, the second starting winning port 12, and the third starting winning port 13 are start winning prizes) First variable display means (for example, a figure) for starting variable display of first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) that can be identified based on the fact that the display result is derived and displayed. 104 and the second execution condition of variable display are established (for example, winning in the third start winning opening 13; however, the first starting winning opening 11 and the second starting winning opening 12) , Any two of the third start winning openings 13 may be started.) Start of variable display of second identification information (for example, third identification information) that can be identified based on each Second variable display means for deriving and displaying the display result (for example, Control information generated during the execution of a game control process (for example, the processes of steps S21 to S35 in FIG. 20), which is a gaming machine provided with the second special symbol display 8b) shown in 104. (For example, start port 1 signal, start port 2 signal, start port 3 signal, symbol determination frequency signal, jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, V signal, bonus release frequency signal shown in FIG. 52) outside the gaming machine Game control information output means (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S30 in the game control microcomputer 560) that outputs to an external device (for example, hall computer) provided is provided. First execution condition establishment information (for example, a start port 1 signal; however, a start port 2 signal or a start port 3 signal indicates that the first execution condition is satisfied when one execution condition is satisfied. May be output to an external device, and when the second execution condition is satisfied, second execution condition satisfaction information (for example, start port 3 signal; Including an execution condition establishment information output means (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S1002 in the game control microcomputer 560) that outputs to the external device. When the first execution condition and the second execution condition are satisfied within a predetermined period (for example, 500 ms), the condition satisfaction information output means outputs the execution condition satisfaction information based on the satisfaction of one of the execution conditions in advance. After the set period elapses, execution condition establishment information based on the establishment of the other execution condition is output (for example, the processing of steps S1116 to S1130 is executed. Specifically, FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, when the start port 1 signal is output, the start port 1 signal is output after 500 ms from the end of the output of the start port 1 signal, and a prize information signal other than the first start port switch is output. If it is, the start port 1 signal is output 500 ms after the end of outputting the winning information signal. Further, as shown in FIG. 54, when the start port 2 signal is being output, the start port 2 signal is output after 500 ms from the end of the output of the start port 2 signal, and the prize information other than the second start port switch is output. When the signal is output, the start port 2 signal is output after 500 ms has elapsed since the end of outputting the winning information signal. As shown in FIG. 55, when the start port 3 signal is output, the start port 3 signal is output after 500 ms has elapsed since the end of the output of the start port 3 signal, and a prize other than the third start port switch is awarded. When the information signal is output, the start port 3 signal may be output after 500 ms has elapsed since the end of the output of the winning information signal.

  The variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) that can be identified based on the fact that the first execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, winning to the first start winning opening 1013) is started and displayed. Based on the first variable display means for deriving and displaying the result (for example, the first special symbol display device 1008a) and the second execution condition for variable display being satisfied (for example, winning in the second start winning opening 1014). A gaming machine comprising second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display device 1008b) for starting variable display of second identification information (for example, a second special symbol) that can identify each of them and deriving and displaying a display result. (For example, the gaming machine shown in FIG. 90), based on the establishment of the first execution condition or the second execution condition, an establishment identification command (for example, the first start) indicating which execution condition is established Winning finger Command, second start winning designation command) and a specific command transmission means for transmitting a specific command (for example, a total pending storage number designation command) capable of specifying that the first execution condition or the second execution condition is satisfied. (For example, the part for executing steps S2118 and S2119 in the game control microcomputer 560) and the first execution condition and the second execution condition based on the established identification command and the specific command transmitted by the specific command transmission means. An established number display means for displaying the established number (for example, the combined pending storage number) in a recognizable manner (for example, the part for executing the pending storage display control process shown in FIGS. 99 to 100 in the production control microcomputer 100); The establishment number display means does not receive the establishment identification command from the specific command transmission means, and When a command is received, the number of first execution conditions and second execution conditions established is displayed in a recognizable manner by displaying that the first execution condition or the second execution condition is satisfied in a predetermined display mode (for example, The production control microcomputer 100 may execute the process of step S1931).

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, when the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device performs the opening operation, the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device that executes the opening operation. Threshold storage means for storing a threshold value used for notifying the abnormal winning of the game, first detection means for detecting a game ball won in the first variable winning ball apparatus and outputting a first detection signal, and a second variable Second detection means for detecting a game ball won in the winning ball apparatus and outputting a second detection signal, and the first detection signal is output from the first detection means during the opening operation of the first variable winning ball apparatus. And a second detection signal is output from the second detection means during the execution of the opening operation of the second variable winning ball apparatus. The number of winnings to the second variable winning ball device based on what has been made The first detection means or the second detection means performs the first detection in the normal game state in which neither the first winning prize number measuring means to measure, nor the first variable winning ball apparatus and the second variable winning ball apparatus perform the opening operation. A normal abnormal winning determination means for determining an abnormal winning based on the output of the signal or the second detection signal, and a winning measured by the first winning number measuring means during the opening operation of the first variable winning ball apparatus. When the number exceeds the first threshold used to notify the abnormal winning to the first variable winning ball device, or is measured by the second winning number measuring means during the opening operation of the second variable winning ball device. Specific abnormal winning determination means for determining abnormal winning based on the fact that the number of winnings exceeds a threshold value used for notifying abnormal winning to the second variable winning ball device, and normal abnormal winning determination means or specific abnormal And an abnormality notification executing means for executing an abnormality notification when the prize determination means determines that the prize is abnormal, and the threshold value storage means is for winning the first variable winning ball device in the opening operation of the first variable winning ball device. A first threshold value that is greater than the standard value is stored, and is a value that is greater than the standard value for winning the second variable winning ball device in the opening operation of the second variable winning ball device, and is different from the first threshold value. The second threshold value is configured to be stored. According to such a configuration, an abnormal winning can be accurately detected and determined in any gaming state such as a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state. In addition, the number of winnings in the abnormal winning determination can be determined differently depending on whether the first variable winning ball apparatus is in the opening operation or the second variable winning ball apparatus is in the opening operation. Even during the opening operation of the winning ball apparatus, the abnormal winning can be accurately detected and determined.

  In the invention according to claim 2, based on the fact that the abnormal winning determination means has determined that an abnormal winning has occurred or the abnormal condition determining means has determined that a predetermined abnormal condition has occurred, the Since the external device is provided with an external output means for outputting a predetermined abnormality signal, a plurality of cases such as occurrence of an abnormal winning and occurrence of a predetermined abnormal state in the gaming machine are provided. Information indicating that an abnormality has occurred can be output to an external device. In addition, when the external output means determines that an abnormal winning has been generated by the abnormal winning determination means and when the predetermined abnormal state has been determined to have occurred by the abnormal state determination means, a common provided in the gaming machine Therefore, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of parts of a mechanism for outputting information to an external device and a complicated wiring operation.

  In the invention according to claim 3, the second variable winning ball apparatus control means controls the second variable winning ball apparatus based on an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the established second transition condition among a plurality of types of opening patterns. Since the threshold value storage means is configured to store different second threshold values depending on the opening pattern by changing between the closed state and the open state, a plurality of different opening numbers and opening times of the second variable winning ball device are different. Even a gaming machine that can execute the opening operation of the second variable winning ball device of the type can determine the abnormal winning based on the optimum threshold according to the type of opening operation of the second variable winning ball device. . Therefore, the abnormal winning determination can be accurately executed in the opening operation of any of the second variable winning ball devices, and the abnormal winning can be more reliably prevented.

  In the invention according to claim 4, when the starting operation control means displays the first opening display result as the display result of the first identification information on the first variable display means, the variable winning ball apparatus is in the open state a predetermined number of times. When the second opening display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display means as the display result of the second identification information, the first starting operation state Since the second start operation control means that shifts to the second start operation state that is more advantageous to the player than the above, it is possible to increase the variation of the game and improve the game entertainment.

  In the invention according to claim 5, the threshold value storage means stores a threshold value used for notifying the abnormal winning to the first variable winning ball apparatus or the second variable winning ball apparatus in the normal gaming state, and the winning number measuring means. However, even in the normal gaming state, the first variable winning ball apparatus or the second variable winning ball apparatus is won based on the output of the first detection signal or the second detection signal from the first detection means or the second detection means. And the normal abnormal winning determination means notifies the abnormal winning to the first variable winning ball apparatus or the second variable winning ball apparatus in the normal gaming state where the winning number measured by the winning number measuring means is in the normal gaming state. The threshold storage means determines that the threshold value in the specific gaming state and the threshold value in the normal gaming state are in a common area of the storage means. Is configured so as to 憶, it is possible to simplify the abnormality winning determination process, it is possible to realize a reduction in area of the storage means.

  In the invention described in claim 6, the abnormality notification execution means performs the abnormality notification in a common mode between the case where the normal abnormality winning determination means determines that the abnormal winning is determined and the case where the specific abnormality winning determination means determines that the abnormal winning is achieved. Since it is comprised so that it may perform, it becomes unnecessary to provide the alerting | reporting aspect for the kind of threshold value, and reduction of data capacity can be implement | achieved.

  In the seventh aspect of the invention, the abnormality notification execution means executes abnormality notification in a different mode between the case where the abnormal winning determination is determined by the normal abnormality winning determination means and the case where the abnormal winning determination is determined by the specific abnormality winning determination means. Therefore, it is possible to inform the game store clerk of the type of abnormality that has occurred.

  In the invention described in claim 8, since the threshold value in the normal gaming state is at least 2 or more, the gaming ball is clogged in the variable winning ball device (the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device), and the specific gaming state Even if the game ball winning is detected because the clogging has been resolved after the completion of the game, it will not be determined as an abnormal winning. Therefore, it can be prevented as much as possible that it is determined that the prize is abnormal even though it is not an illegal prize.

  According to the ninth aspect of the present invention, the game control information output means outputs the first execution condition establishment information indicating that the first execution condition is established when the first execution condition is established to the external device, and the second execution Including execution condition establishment information output means for outputting second execution condition establishment information indicating that the second execution condition is established to the external device when the condition is established, the execution condition establishment information output means within a predetermined period When the first execution condition and the second execution condition are satisfied, the execution condition based on the satisfaction of the other execution condition after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the execution condition satisfaction information is output based on the satisfaction of the one execution condition Since the establishment information is output, even if the establishment of the first execution condition and the establishment of the second execution condition occur continuously within a preset period, the establishment of each execution condition Execution based on The matter establishment information can be recognized in the external device.

  In the invention according to claim 10, when the establishment number display means receives the specific command without receiving the establishment identification command from the specific command transmission means, the first execution condition or the second execution condition is established in a predetermined display mode. Since it is configured so that the number of established execution conditions and the second execution condition can be recognized by displaying the fact that it has been done, even if the establishment identification command is missed, the number of established cases is recognized by the player It can be displayed in a possible manner, and distrust to the player can be prevented.

Embodiment 1 FIG.
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. The lower part of the hitting ball supply tray 3 has a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and the speed at which the hitting ball launching device launches the game balls (that is, the strength of the spring that plays the game balls). And a hitting ball operating handle (operating knob) 5 for adjusting the height).

  The player can adjust the momentum of the game ball fired from the ball striking device by rotating the operation knob 5. Specifically, by rotating the operation knob 5 to the right, the speed of the game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device gradually increases, and when it exceeds a predetermined speed, Enters the left area of the gaming area 7 from above through the hitting rail. When the operation knob 5 is further rotated to the right, the launched game ball enters the right area of the game area 7 from above. Therefore, by changing the rotation amount with the operation knob 5 rotated to the right, it is possible to adjust the momentum of the game ball launched from the hitting ball launching device, and to adjust the area into which the game ball is to be shot. .

  A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 partitioned by guide rails is formed on the front surface of the game board 6.

  A variable winning ball apparatus 20 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area 7. Below the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a first winning prize opening 11, a second starting prize opening 12, and a variable winning ball apparatus 15 forming a third starting prize opening 13 are provided. The winning ball that has entered the first starting winning port 11 is detected by the first starting port switch 11a, and the winning ball that has entered the second starting winning port 12 is detected by the second starting port switch 12a. Guided to the back. In addition, the winning ball that has entered the third starting winning opening 13 that can be won when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is detected by the third starting opening switch 13 a and guided to the back of the game board 6. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 15a. Hereinafter, the first start winning port 11, the second start winning port 12, and the third starting winning port 13 may be collectively referred to as “start winning ports” or may be expressed as starting winning ports 11, 12, and 13. . Further, the first start port switch 11a, the second start port switch 12a, and the third start port switch 13a may be collectively referred to as “start port switches” or may be represented as start port switches 11a, 12a, and 13a. .

  When the game ball wins the start winning opening and is detected by the start opening switch and is a small hit, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to open and close once or twice. By the opening / closing control, the left open door 76A moves to the left from the initial position, and the right open door 76B moves to the right from the initial position, so that the variable winning ball device 20 enters the open state, and the open door 76A. , 76B return to the initial position, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is closed. The state where the variable winning ball apparatus 20 performs the opening operation in response to the detection of the winning of the start port switch in this way is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be referred to as a grand prize opening (second grand prize opening, upper university prize opening) or an accessory. In addition, the game board 6 is provided with various kinds of winnings. Hereinafter, the winning combination means the variable winning ball apparatus 20.

  Further, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to open and close a predetermined number of times, that is, a predetermined number of rounds, when a big hit game start condition (for example, the game ball has won a specific area in the starting operation state) is satisfied. This state is called a big hit gaming state (specific gaming state). In the big hit gaming state, a high percentage is won, and a large number of game balls are paid out to the player. Note that, except for the start operation state, a state in which the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is controlled to open and close (a big hit game state) may be referred to as a second big hit game state.

  An effect display device 9 such as an LCD for effect display is provided on the back side inside the variable winning ball device 20. The effect display device 9 variably displays a decorative symbol as identification information (variable display). In this embodiment, the effect display device 9 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right” (see “decorative symbol display area 9a” in FIG. 73). ).

  On the right side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a special symbol display 8 for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information is provided. The special symbol display 8 is configured by, for example, a 7-segment display.

  Above the special symbol display 8 is provided a special symbol hold memory display 18 composed of four LEDs for displaying the number of effective winning balls with game balls in the start winning opening, that is, the starting memory number (holding memory number). ing. The special symbol hold memory display 18 displays up to four starting memory numbers in the order of winning. The special symbol storage memory display 18 increases the number of LEDs in the lit state by 1 every time there is an effective start winning in the start winning openings 11, 12, and 13. Each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8, the number of LEDs that are lit is reduced by 1 (that is, one LED is turned off). In this example, the special symbol hold memory display 18 shifts the lighting state each time variable display is started on the special symbol display 8. As will be described later, since the start memory number is also displayed on the effect display device 9 (see “hold memory number display area 9c” in FIG. 73), the special symbol hold memory display 18 may not be provided.

  On the left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 20, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. When the game ball passes through the gate 32 provided in the game area 7 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 displays a variable symbol of a normal symbol (in this example, a numeric display with a 7-segment LED). Be started. In this embodiment, “7” is stopped and displayed at the end of variable display in the case of winning, and other than “7” is stopped and displayed in the case of losing. In the case of winning, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. Above the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of balls passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the gate 32 passes, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increments the LED to be turned on by one. Then, every time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. It should be noted that two gates 32 may be provided, and even if a game ball passes through any of the gates 32, the normal symbol variation may be started in one normal symbol display 10.

  Under the variable winning ball apparatus 15, there are provided large winning holes (first large winning hole, lower large winning hole) in which the open / close plate 16 is opened by the solenoid 21 in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). Yes. The opening / closing plate 16 is a means for opening and closing the special winning opening. The winning ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23. In this embodiment, the next round in the big hit gaming state is started when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have won the big winning opening or when a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed. (Except for the final round). Hereinafter, the grand prize opening by the variable prize ball device 20 may be referred to as a second grand prize opening (or upper university prize opening), and the grand prize opening by the opening / closing plate 16 may be referred to as a first grand prize opening (lower university prize opening). . The first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening may be collectively referred to as “large winning prize opening”.

  In addition, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 38 is provided on the right side of the opening / closing plate 16, and a winning opening (normal winning opening) 39 is provided on the left side of the opening / closing plate 16. The game balls that have won the game ball winning openings 38 and 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 38a and 39a. The winning openings 38 and 39 constitute a winning area provided in the game board 6 as an area for accepting game media and allowing winning. The start winning opening also constitutes a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning, and a winning area is also provided inside the large winning opening (the first and second large winning openings). When a game ball wins a winning area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player as a prize (prize ball).

  Decorative lamps blinking and displayed during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 7, and an outlet 26 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize is provided at the bottom.

  Two speakers 27 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a top frame lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b, and a right frame lamp 28c are provided. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (variable winning ball apparatus 20 or the like) in the game area 7. The top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, the right frame lamp 28c, and the decoration LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  In this example, a prize ball LED 51 that is lit during award ball payout is provided in the vicinity of the left frame lamp 28b, and a ball cut LED 52 that is lit when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28c. It has been. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  The game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through the ball striking rail, and then falls in the game area 7. The hit ball enters the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 11, the second starting winning opening 12 or the third starting winning opening 13) and the start opening switch (the first starting opening switch 11a, the second starting opening switch 12a or the third starting opening). When detected by the mouth switch 13a), if the variable display of the symbol can be started, the special symbol starts variable display on the special symbol display 8, and the decorative symbol starts variable display on the effect display device 9. If it is not in a state in which the variable display of the symbol can be started, if the number of start winning memories which is the reserved storage of the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 8 is not the upper limit number, the starting winning memory number is increased by one. That is, the number of LEDs to be turned on in the special symbol storage memory display 18 is increased by one.

  The variable display of special symbols (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 8 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a big hit symbol (specific display result: specifically, “7”, for example), the first big hit gaming state in the big hit gaming state (big hit that starts without going through the starting operation state) Transition to gaming state. Also, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a small hit symbol (open display result: specifically, for example, “0” “1” “2” “4” “5” “6” “8” “9”) Is shifted to the starting operation state. The starting operation state is also referred to as a small hit gaming state. When a game ball wins a special area provided inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the start operation state, the state shifts to a second big hit game state (a big hit game state started after passing through the start operation state).

  Next, the variable winning ball apparatus 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3 are front views of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 provided on the game board 6 as viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a structure having game ball passing ports 71, 72, 73 provided on the back side of the open doors 76A, 76B shown in FIGS. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a path from the passing port 71 to the specific winning port 66 that forms the specific region. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a path from the passing port 73 to the specific winning port 66 that forms the specific region. FIGS. 7A, 8A and 9 are top views of the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 as viewed from above, and FIGS. 7B and 8B are variable winning ball apparatuses. It is the front view which looked at the lower part of 20 from the front side. FIG. 9 also shows a rotating body (disk) 86 provided immediately above the specific winning opening 66. FIG. 10 is a top view of the rotator 86 as viewed from above. 3 and 5 to 9, the arrows indicate the course of the game ball.

  When the open doors 76 </ b> A and 76 </ b> B are opened by driving the opening / closing motor 75, the variable winning ball device (combination object) 20 is in a state where a game ball can enter. The game ball that has entered the accessory 20 passes through any of the passage openings 71, 72, 73 and flows down to the lower side of the accessory 20. The game ball that has passed through the passage opening 71 is detected by the first winning combination winning switch 71a, and the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 72 is detected by the second winning combination winning switch 72a and has passed through the passage opening 73. Is detected by the third prize winning switch 73a. The game ball that has passed through the passage port 72 is guided to the right in the accessory 20 through the guide rod 73A. The game ball that has passed through the passage openings 71 and 73 passes through the guide rod 71A and is guided to the left in the accessory 20. 2 shows a state in which the open doors 76A and 76B are closed and the game ball cannot enter the accessory 20, and FIG. 3 shows a state in which the open doors 76A and 76B are opened. Yes. In addition, the first prize winning switch 71a, the second prize winning switch 72a, and the third prize winning switch 73a may be collectively referred to as an “act winning prize switch”.

  Open doors 76A and 76B (not shown in FIG. 4) are provided on the front side of the structure shown in FIG. The game ball reaches one of the passage openings 71, 72, 73 through any of the three passages (routes from the front side to the back side) in the structure shown in FIG. 4. When the open doors 76A and 76B are closed (fully closed state), the game ball cannot enter any of the three passage openings 71, 72, and 73. When the open doors 76A and 76B are in the open state, the open doors 76A and 76B can enter any of the three passage openings 71, 72, and 73. Although it is possible to enter any of the passage openings 71, 72, and 73, the probability that a game ball enters the passage openings 71 and 73 is higher than the probability that the game ball enters the passage opening 72. Moreover, in the period when the open doors 76A and 76B shift from the fully open state to the fully closed state, it becomes easier to pass through the central passage port 72 as compared to the left and right passage ports 71 and 73 as the open area becomes narrower. In addition, during the period of transition from the fully closed state to the fully opened state, the game ball gradually enters a state where it can enter any of the three passage ports 71, 72, 73 from a state where the game ball easily enters the central passage port 72. Transition.

  That is, immediately after the opening doors 76A and 76B start transition from the fully closed state to the open state and immediately before returning to the fully closed state, the proportion of the game balls passing through the central passage 72 is relatively high. . Note that opening the opening doors 76A, 76B means that the accessory 20 is in an open state, and closing the opening doors 76A, 76B means that the accessory 20 is in a closed state. Moreover, the open door 76A and the open door 76B move in a symmetrical state. Moving in a symmetrical state means that the distance from the center (the central axis of the central passage port 72) to the end of the open door 76A (the end near the central passage 72) and the end of the open door 76B ( This means that the distance to the end near the central passage 72 is always the same.

  Movable members 77 and 78 are provided on the left and right sides of the accessory 20. The moving part in the movable member 77 is a movable part 77A, and the moving part in the movable member 78 is a movable part 78A. The movable portion 77A is moved by a movable portion drive solenoid 77B, and the movable portion 78A is moved by a movable portion drive solenoid 78B. The movable portion 77A and the movable portion 78A move in the vertical direction. A game ball that has won a specific winning opening 66 that forms a specific area provided at the bottom of the accessory 20 is detected by a specific area switch 66a. Note that the fact that the game ball has won the specific winning opening 66 and is detected by the specific area switch 66a is also referred to as V winning.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (A), a game ball that has passed through the passage openings 71 and 73 and is guided by a guide rod 71A (not shown in FIG. 5) passes through a passage 71B that leads to a specific winning opening 66. It is possible to reach the area. The passage 71B becomes an open portion (a saddle-shaped passage) whose upper part is open from the middle, and a disconnecting passage 71C that is a passage that is connected to the passage 71B and cannot reach a specific area is provided at the beginning of the open portion. Yes. As shown in FIG. 5 (B), the movable portion 77A prevents the passage of the game ball downstream of the passage 71B at the beginning of the opening portion of the passage 71B during operation (when in the lower position). Is guided to the disengagement passage 71C. As shown in FIG. 5A, when the movable portion 77A is in the upper position, the game ball is not blocked by the movable portion 77A, and flows down to the downstream side of the passage 71B from the position where the movable portion 77A is provided. .

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), the game ball that has passed through the passage opening 72 and is guided by the guide rod 73A (not shown in FIG. 6) passes through the passage 73B to the specific winning opening 66 and enters the specific area. It is possible to reach. The passage 73B is an open portion (a bowl-shaped passage) that is open from the middle. The opening part of the passage 73B is curved, and there is no wall inside the curve at the beginning of the opening part. As shown in FIG. 6B, the movable portion 78A prevents the game ball from passing downstream of the passage 73B at the beginning of the opening portion of the passage 73B during operation (when in the lower position). Is guided from the portion where the inner wall does not exist to the slipping passage 73C, which is a passage that cannot reach the specific region. As shown in FIG. 6A, when the movable portion 78A is in the upper position, the game ball is not blocked by the movable portion 78A, and flows through the passage 73B along the outer wall of the curve by centrifugal force. It flows down from the position where the movable portion 78A is provided to the downstream side of the passage 73B.

  The passage 73B reaches the midway hole 74. A rotating body 86 is provided immediately below the midway hole 74. The rotating body 86 is an accessory formed in a conical shape with a volcano as a motif, and has a flat portion at the top. The game ball that has passed through the intermediate hole 74 flows down to the rotating body 86.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the game ball that has passed through the midway hole 74 flows down to the specific area side through the passage 74B. The passage 74 </ b> B merges with the passage 71 </ b> B, which is a route from the passage openings 71 and 73, in the upper part of the rotating body 86.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening 66 and is detected by the specific area switch 66a is further detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. A game ball that has not won the specific winning opening 66 is also detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. That is, in this embodiment, all game balls that have entered the accessory 20 are detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a. Note that the game path won in the specific winning slot 66 is not detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a, and only the game balls that have not won in the specific winning slot 66 are detected by the bonus discharge switch 85a. It may be configured. In this case, the sum of the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 66a and the number of game balls detected by the accessory discharge switch 85a is the number of game balls discharged from the accessory 20.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (A), the game balls that have passed through the slipping paths 71C and 73C do not pass through the specific winning openings 66 from the slipping openings 67 and 68 that are formed in the vicinity immediately above the specific winning openings 66. Be guided to.

  The rotating body 86 is formed in a disk shape, and is arranged with the rotation axis directed in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 10, a plurality of holes 86 </ b> C are formed in the outer peripheral edge of the rotating body 86, and a notch 86 </ b> A is provided in a part of the outer peripheral edge. Moreover, the area | region (internal area | region) inside the donut part in the rotary body 86 is an area | region formed in planar shape. In the example shown in FIG. 10, seven holes 86C are provided. The game ball that has entered the passage 74B from the midway hole 74 and the game ball that has passed through the passages 71B and 73B reach the outer peripheral edge of the rotating body 86. At this time, if the cutout portion 86A of the rotating body 86 is located in the front, that is, if it is located at the junction 81 (see FIG. 8) above the specific winning opening 66, the specific winning opening. 66 can be won. When the hole 86C is located, the game ball that has entered the hole 86C is moved by the rotating body 86 and is guided from the detachment port 69 to a path that does not pass through the specific winning port 66. The hole 86C is a communication hole that does not have a bottom surface. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the hole 86C can fall to the lower part, but the fall of the game 86 by the structure on the back surface of the rotating body 86 until the hole 86C containing the game ball reaches the position of the outlet 69. It is blocked. In addition, the inner wall portion of the hole portion 86C prevents the hole portion 86C from falling toward the specific winning opening 66. The space between one hole 86C and the hole 86C adjacent to the hole 86C (hereinafter referred to as a flat surface 86C) is flat, so that the game ball does not fall from there.

  As indicated by broken line arrows in FIG. 9, the rotating body 86 rotates (in this example, rotates counterclockwise) by driving of the rotating body drive motor 87 (see FIG. 10). During the rotation of the rotating body 86, the game ball that has reached the rotating body 86 when the notch 86A is positioned immediately above the specific winning opening 66 falls out from the notch 86A to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 86, and the specific winning award. A prize can be awarded to the mouth 66.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a plurality of (two in this example) sensors 87 a and 87 b for position detection are provided in the vicinity of the rotating body 86. Each of the sensors 87a and 87b includes, for example, a light emitting element such as a light emitting diode and a light receiving element such as a photodiode or a phototransistor installed so as to sandwich the rotating body 86. The rotating body 86 is provided with a hole 87c. It has been. The hole 87 c is formed at a predetermined position in the inner region of the rotating body 86. Specifically, it is formed at a position that allows light from the light emitting element to pass to the light receiving element side when the rotating body 86 rotates and the region including the hole portion is at a position corresponding to the sensor installation position. The light receiving elements in each sensor are hereinafter referred to as a first position sensor 87a and a second position sensor 87b.

  The game ball that has passed through the intermediate hole 74 and has reached the rotating body 86 through the passage 74B is almost always dropped from the notch 86A and specified when the notch 86A is located immediately above the specific winning opening 66. Wins a prize opening 66. The passage 74B is formed on the inclined surface of the conical accessory. Accordingly, even when the flat portion 86C is positioned directly above the specific winning opening 66, the game ball passing through the passage 74B is momentum, so that the gaming ball gets over the flat portion 86C and reaches the specific winning opening 66. It is supposed to fall into.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the central passage 72, the V prize is obtained with a higher probability than when the game ball passes through the left passage 71 or the right passage 73. Will occur. That is, the right route from the passing port 72 is easier to guide the game ball to the specific winning port 66 than the left route from the passing ports 71 and 73.

  In this embodiment, it is assumed that a winning occurs when a game ball is detected by the accessory winning switch in the small hit game state and the second big hit game state. That is, an area in which the three prize winning switches 71a, 72a, 73a are provided corresponds to the winning area. However, a switch for detecting a game ball may be provided inside the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in addition to the prize winning switch, and a winning may occur when the game ball is detected by the switch.

  Next, each board | substrate provided in the back side in the accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 20) is demonstrated. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the arrangement of the substrates attached to the variable winning ball apparatus 20. As shown in FIG. 11, substrates 950 </ b> A to 950 </ b> D are attached to the accessory 20 on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the back surface, respectively. Hereinafter, the board 950A attached to the left side of the accessory 20 is referred to as the center left board, the board 950B attached to the right side is referred to as the center right board, and the board 950D attached to the upper side is referred to as the center upper board. The substrate 950C attached below is also referred to as a center lower substrate. A plurality of lamps 196a as decorative display lamps are mounted on the center left substrate 950A. A magnetic sensor 95a for detecting magnetism is mounted on the center left substrate 950A. In addition, a plurality of lamps 196b as decoration display lamps are mounted on the center right substrate 950B. In addition, a magnetic sensor 95f for detecting magnetism is mounted on the center right substrate 950B. In addition, a plurality of lamps 196c as decoration display lamps are mounted on the center lower substrate 950C. In addition, three magnetic sensors 95b, 95c, and 95e for detecting magnetism are mounted on the center lower substrate 950C. Hereinafter, the magnetic sensor 95a is referred to as a first magnetic sensor, the magnetic sensor 95b is referred to as a second magnetic sensor, the magnetic sensor 95c is referred to as a third magnetic sensor, the magnetic sensor 95d is referred to as a fourth magnetic sensor, and the magnetic sensor 95e is referred to as a magnetic sensor 95e. It is called a fifth magnetic sensor, and the magnetic sensor 95f is also called a sixth magnetic sensor. In addition, a plurality of lamps 196d as decorative display lamps are mounted on the center upper substrate 905D.

  In this embodiment, reed switches are used as the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f. The reed switch is formed so that two ferromagnetic leads are opposed to each other with a predetermined contact interval and sealed in a glass tube. When a magnetic field is applied to the reed switch from the outside in the axial direction of the lead, the lead is magnetized, and the opposite free ends are attracted and contacted with each other, thereby making the circuit conductive.

  The magnetic sensors 95a to 95f detect the presence of abnormal magnetism and detect a detection signal when an illegal act is attempted such that a game ball that has entered the accessory 20 is awarded to the specific winning opening 66 using a magnet or the like. Output. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11, each magnetic sensor 95a-95f is arrange | positioned in the direction where a longitudinal direction cross | intersects the surface of the front glass of the glass door frame 2, and it uses a magnet from the front glass side. It is easier to detect fraudulent behavior. Due to its structure, the reed switch has directivity so as to strongly detect magnetism in the longitudinal direction, and does not have strong directivity in a direction crossing the longitudinal direction. For this reason, if an arrangement is made such that the direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the reed switch is located at a site where an illegal act using a magnet is likely to be performed, an illegal act using a magnet may not be detected well. Therefore, in this embodiment, each magnetic sensor 95a-95f which is a reed switch is arrange | positioned so that it may be located in a longitudinal direction with respect to the site | part in which the illegal act using a magnet is easy to be performed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11, a vibration sensor board 96 on which a vibration sensor 96a is mounted is attached to the lower right side of the portion of the game board 6 where the accessory 20 is attached. In this embodiment, when an illegal act such as shaking a gaming machine is performed, the vibration sensor 96a detects vibration and outputs a detection signal. The vibration sensor 96a may be provided on another board such as the main board 31 or the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of how the game progresses in the gaming machine of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 12, when the game ball is won at the start winning opening and the detection signal of any of the start opening switches 11a, 12a, 13a is turned on, that is, when a start winning occurs, the progress of the game is controlled. A lottery is executed by the game control means. The result of the lottery is “big hit”, “small hit” or “out of game”. Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started. When the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, when the big hit is determined (when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed), the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state (first big hit gaming state). In the first big hit gaming state, the opening / closing control of the big winning opening (first big winning opening) by the opening / closing plate 16 is performed 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening allowable time is 29 seconds). In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state is fixed at 16, but the number of rounds (for example, any one of 2 rounds, 7 rounds, and 16 rounds) may be determined by lottery or the like.

  When the small hit is determined (when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed), the game control means controls the accessory 20 to the open state and starts the starting operation. In the starting operation state, the accessory 20 is open for 0.9 seconds. The number of times of opening (number of times of opening) is once or twice. In the start-up operation state, when a game ball wins the accessory 20, and when the game ball wins the specific winning slot 66 and is detected by the specific area switch 66a, a V prize is generated. When a V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state (second big hit gaming state). In the second big hit game state, the accessory 20 (variable winning ball device, second big prize opening) is 3 times, 7 times or 11 times (3 rounds, 7 rounds or 11 rounds: 1 round has a permissible opening time of 29 seconds. ) Open / close controlled. If no V prize is generated, the game does not enter the second big hit gaming state. In this embodiment, the number of rounds in the second big hit gaming state is determined according to the type of the small hit symbol (see FIG. 22).

  In this embodiment, when the small hit game (game in the starting operation state) is completed, before the transition to the second big hit game state, the predetermined display (after the starting operation state) using the effect display device 9 or the like is performed. Production) is executed. Note that the effect after the start operation state is executed even when the V winning is not generated in the small hit game.

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the change of the special symbol and the start of the small hit game. As shown in FIG. 13, when the “start winning prize” occurs, the special symbol display 8 changes the special symbol, and the effect display device 9 performs the display effect in synchronization therewith. When the variation time has elapsed, a special symbol stop symbol is derived and displayed. If the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol, the accessory 20 is released (blade released) and a small hit game is started. As will be described below, the decorative display pattern 9 is changed in the effect display device 9 in synchronization with the change of the special pattern (see FIG. 73), but in FIG. 13, the decorative pattern change is omitted. . Moreover, although the display of the reserved memory number is performed on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 73), the display of the reserved memory number is omitted in FIG. Furthermore, in the time-short state (time shortening state in which the variation time of the special symbol is shortened), the effect display device 9 displays the remaining number of short times (see FIG. 73), but in FIG. The display is omitted.

  FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the start of the small hit game, and the start of the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 14, when the “start winning prize” occurs, the special symbol display 8 changes the special symbol, and the effect display device 9 performs the display effect in synchronization therewith. Note that the example shown in FIG. 14 is an example in which variation patterns # 7A to # 7C described later are used. When the fluctuation time has elapsed, a special symbol stop symbol is derived and displayed, and the stop symbol is a small hit symbol (“0” “1” “2” “4” “5” “6” “8” “9”). In such a case, the accessory 20 is opened (blade opened) and the small hit game is started. When the stop symbol is a jackpot symbol (“7”), a jackpot display (“big hit”) is performed and a jackpot game is started. In that case, the small hit game (game in the starting operation state) is not executed. When the stop symbol is the off symbol (“3”), neither the small hit game nor the big hit game is started, and the process proceeds to the next symbol variation.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the jackpot game state (first jackpot game state) that occurs when the stop symbol of the special symbol becomes a specific symbol, and the jackpot that occurs when a V-winning occurs in the jackpot game Since there is a game state (second jackpot game state), the player can enjoy a plurality of types of jackpot games. Note that when the variation patterns # 7A to # 7C are used, the variation time is long, so even if the result is a small hit, the player is not required to go through the starting operation state until the variation time ends. It can be expected to occur. This is the same when the variation patterns # 8A to # 8C and # 9A to # 9C are used. In addition, as will be described below, the decoration display pattern 9 is changed in the effect display device 9 in synchronization with the change of the special pattern. However, in FIG. 14, the decoration pattern change is omitted.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the period of the effect after the end of the small hit game. FIG. 15 (A) shows an example in which the game ball does not win the game 20 at all when the game 20 is opened in the starting operation state. In that case, when the delay time, that is, the winning monitoring time (in this example, 2 seconds) elapses, an effect (for example, an effect illustrated in FIG. 83A) for a certain time (in this example) is executed. .

  FIG. 15 (B) shows an example in which the game ball wins the accessory 20 when the accessory 20 is opened in the starting operation state but does not win the V. In this case, both conditions that the winning monitoring time (2 seconds in this example) has passed and that all the game balls that won the winning combination 20 have been discharged from the winning combination 20 are confirmed. If established, an effect for a certain time (for example, an effect illustrated in FIG. 83B) is executed. Then, when the production time ends, if the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variation of the special symbol is started based on the reserved memories. In FIG. 15B, an example in which one game ball is won in the prize 20 and a game ball that has not yet been discharged from the prize 20 when the prize monitoring time has elapsed. An example of is shown.

  FIG. 15C shows an example in which the game ball wins the winning combination 20 and the V winning is made when the winning combination 20 is opened in the starting operation state. In that case, both conditions that the winning monitoring time (2 seconds in this example) has passed and that all the game balls that won the winning combination 20 are discharged from the winning combination 20 are confirmed. If established, an effect for a certain time (for example, an effect illustrated in FIGS. 83C and 83D) is executed. When the production time ends, the game shifts to a big hit gaming state in which the big prize opening is opened. FIG. 15C shows an example in which one game ball is won in the accessory 20 and an example in which all the game balls are discharged from the accessory 20 before the winning monitoring time elapses. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, every time the start operation is completed (every time corresponding to the start operation state, that is, every time corresponding to the variable display in which the display result is a small hit symbol), the production is always performed. Executed. In this embodiment, the production time is constant, but the production time may be changed depending on, for example, when a V prize is generated and when a V prize is not generated.

  Note that the winning monitoring time is the time from when the game ball enters the accessory 20 until the game ball is detected by any of the accessory winning switches 71a, 72a, 73a. It is. Specifically, this is the time from when the game ball enters the accessory 20 until the switch with the most delayed detection among the accessory prize winning switches 71a, 72a, 73a can reliably detect the game ball. By providing the winning monitoring time, it is possible to prevent the presentation from being started before the game ball that has entered the accessory 20 is detected.

  FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between a special symbol stop symbol and a winning type. As shown in FIG. 16, the special symbol stop symbol is an off symbol (“3” in this example), a big hit symbol (“7” in this example), and a small hit symbol (in this example, “3”). However, the small hit symbol and the number of rounds in the second big hit gaming state correspond to each other. Further, the small hit symbol corresponds to the number of times the accessory 20 is released in the starting operation state. Therefore, a display relating to the player's advantage (disadvantage) is made at the stage before the V-winning occurs in the small hit game, and the player's interest is drawn to whether or not the game ball will win the specific winning slot 66. Can do. In this embodiment, the number of rounds is determined by the type of the small hit symbol, but in addition to the type of the small hit symbol, it is determined depending on which of the passing holes 71, 72, 73 the game ball has passed. You may make it vary the range and kind of round number, and the distribution ratio of a round. Alternatively, a random number may be extracted based on the game ball passing through the specific winning opening 66 (V winning has occurred), and the number of rounds may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Note that the accessory 20 is controlled to be in an open state only in the starting operation state and the big hit gaming state. Therefore, in a game state other than those states, the game ball does not win a prize. Therefore, if a winning is detected inside the accessory in a gaming state (normal state) other than those states, the winning is not a regular winning (abnormal winning). Therefore, in this embodiment, when an abnormal winning occurs, a notification to that effect is given. Therefore, in the gaming machine provided with the accessory 20, it is easy to find fraud.

  FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. FIG. 14 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached.

  The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 for generating hardware random numbers. The random number circuit 503 may be provided outside the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 instead of being built in the game control microcomputer 560.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. In this embodiment, the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  In addition, the gate switch 32a, the first start opening switch 11a, the second start opening switch 12a, the third start opening switch 13a, the first winning combination winning switch 71a, the second winning combination winning switch 72a, and the third winning combination winning switch 73a. , A specific area switch 66a, an accessory discharge switch 85a, a prize opening switch 38a, 39a, a count switch 23, an input driver circuit for supplying detection signals from the first position sensor 87a and the second position sensor 87b to the game control microcomputer 560. 58 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, a solenoid 15a for opening / closing the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a solenoid 21 for opening / closing the opening / closing plate 16, an opening / closing motor 75 for opening / closing the opening / closing doors 76A, 76B, a movable part driving solenoid 77B for operating the movable part 77A, An output circuit 59 for driving the movable portion drive solenoid 78B for operating the movable portion 78A in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 inputs detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95 a to 95 f and the vibration sensor 96 a through the I / O port unit 57.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a special symbol display 8 that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, a special symbol hold memory display 18, and a normal symbol hold memory display 41. Perform display control.

  In this embodiment, an effect control means (configured by an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 177. The display control of the effect display device 9, the lighting control of the lamp, and the control of the speaker 27 are performed.

  FIG. 18 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 177, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 177 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 177 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 177). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  Further, the signal input from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 177 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). A unidirectional circuit 177A as a means is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 18 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal directed from the relay board 177 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, a signal from the relay board 177 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 also receives detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95 a to 95 f and the vibration sensor 96 a via the input port 106. Thus, since the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a are configured to be input to the effect control CPU 101, it is possible to reduce the room for an unauthorized signal to be input to the CPU 56. Can do. That is, when the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a are input to the CPU 56, an illegal signal (to the CPU 56 using the signal line (signal input path) ( For example, there is a possibility that a signal for recognizing that a prize has been generated in a pseudo manner or a signal for forcibly generating a big hit is input. However, as shown in FIG. 18, when detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a are input to the effect control CPU 101, such illegal signals are input to the effect control CPU 101. There is no risk of being used for fraud.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamp and supplies the amplified signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 28a, the left frame lamp 28b, and the right frame lamp 28c. Further, it is supplied to a decorative lamp (not shown) provided on the frame side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, a decorative symbol variation period).

  The signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are communicated between the effect control CPU 101, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70, such that a response signal is transmitted from the signal reception side to the transmission side. Communication).

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol or the like (including a decorative design and a background design) in advance. The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address. The CPU 56 also executes processing for initializing the random number circuit 503. The CPU 56 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R. The random number circuit 503 generates a random number using a predetermined clock signal. As an example, the random number circuit 503 is set to output any numerical value of 0 to 598 to the CPU 56 when the numerical value is read from the CPU 56.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15, including S44 and S45).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 restores the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) to 0, but is initialized to an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. You may make it do. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S10 to S12, for example, an initial value (for example, 0) is set to a flag for performing processing selectively according to the control state, such as a special symbol process flag.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets an abnormality notification prohibition flag (step S44) and sets a value corresponding to the prohibition period value in the prohibition period timer (step S45). The prohibition period value is a value indicating a period during which an abnormal winning notification described later is prohibited. The abnormality notification prohibition flag is a flag indicating that notification of an abnormal winning is prohibited, and is maintained in the set state until the prohibition period timer times out. Therefore, the start of the abnormal winning notification is prohibited for a predetermined period after the initialization notification is started in the effect display device 9.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets a value of “3” as a threshold value in the abnormal winning determination counter that counts the number of abnormal winnings (step S46). The threshold set in step S46 is a big winning opening in the normal state other than the big hit gaming state (the first big winning gaming state, the second big hit gaming state) and the small hit gaming state (starting operation state) (the first big winning hole 16). , A value that allows a game ball to be awarded to the second big prize opening 20). In other words, in a normal state, a game ball should not normally win the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 16, second grand prize opening 20), but the big prize opening (first grand prize opening 16, first prize winning opening 16, It is also conceivable that a game ball is jammed in the two big winning holes 20), and that the winning of the game ball is detected when the clog is eliminated after the big hit gaming state / small hit gaming state is completed. Further, there may be a case in which it is erroneously detected that a detection signal is output from the count switch 23 or the prize winning prize switches 71a to 73a due to noise or the like. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the count switch 23 or the like detects a game ball in the normal state, if the number of detections is up to two times (that is, the number of winning prizes in the big prize opening is up to two), In order to allow the winning of the game balls, the value “3” is set as the threshold value in step S46. As will be described later, when the number of detections by the count switch 23 or the like is three, it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, and processing for executing abnormality notification is executed (see steps S588 and S589 in FIG. 67). The abnormal winning determination counter is formed in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the normal symbol, and the display random number update process is to update the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. It is processing. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is a counter (normal symbol determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls itself a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the gaming machine. In a process for transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a game device control process), the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol is one round (normal When the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the random number for determination per symbol is increased), an initial value is set in the counter.

  Although not shown in FIG. 19, when the power is turned on (for example, after execution of the process of step S5, after execution of the process of step S45, etc.), control for returning the rotating body 86 to the initial position is executed.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S35 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, via the input driver circuit 58, the gate switch 32a, the first start opening switch 11a, the second start opening switch 12a, the third start opening switch 13a, the first winning combination winning switch 71a, and the second winning combination winning switch 72a. The detection signals of the third prize winning switch 73a, the specific area switch 66a, the prize discharging switch 85a, the prize opening switches 38a and 39a, the count switch 23, the first position sensor 87a and the second position sensor 87b are inputted, and Is determined (switching process: step S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a display control process for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S33 and S34.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process for notifying an abnormal winning when, for example, it is detected that a game ball has won a prize winning slot at a time other than the regular time (step S23: abnormal winning notifying process).

  Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S24). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S25 and S26).

FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 2: Determine the variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(2) Random 3: Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(3) Random 4: Determine initial value of random 3 (for determining random 3 initial value)
(4) Random 5: Determine the stop symbol of the normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)

  Note that a random number generated by the random number circuit 503 is used as a big hit determination random number for determining whether to make a big hit or a small hit. Hereinafter, the jackpot determination random number may be referred to as random 1 or random R. The random numbers (1) to (4) (random 2 to random 5) may be referred to as software random numbers.

  In step S24 in the game control process shown in FIG. 20, the game control microcomputer 560 counts up (adds 1) a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination in (2). That is, the normal random number for determination per symbol is a random number for determination, and the other random numbers are display random numbers or initial value random numbers. In order to enhance the gaming effect, software random numbers other than the random numbers (1) to (4) may be used.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol stop symbol is also determined by determining whether or not the big hit or the small hit is generated by random 1 (random R) that is a hardware random number.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S27). In the special symbol process, the processing corresponding to the special symbol process flag for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special prize opening (the big prize opening by the accessory 20 and the opening / closing plate 16) in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. Execute. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S28). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to a normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 and the control state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command related to the display control of the effect display device 9 (effect control command control process: step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S30).

  The CPU 56 also includes a first start opening switch 11a, a second start opening switch 12a, a third start opening switch 13a, a first winning combination winning switch 71a, a second winning combination winning switch 72a, a third winning combination winning combination switch 73a, Prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the prize opening switches 38a and 39a and the count switch 23 is executed (step S31). Specifically, the first start opening switch 11a, the second start opening switch 12a, the third start opening switch 13a, the first winning combination winning switch 71a, the second winning combination winning switch 72a, the third winning combination winning switch 73a, A payout control command indicating the number of winning balls is given to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to detection of a win based on the fact that any one of the prize opening switches 38a, 39a and the count switch 23 is turned on. Output. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 provides the output port with contents relating to solenoid on / off in the RAM area of the output port. Output (step S32: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed of the special symbol is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 performs variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S34). For example, if the fluctuation rate of the normal symbol is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S35), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of steps S21 to S34 (excluding step S30) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a relationship between a special symbol stop symbol and a determination value. However, FIG. 22 shows the number of determination values, not specific determination values. In this embodiment, the range of numerical values that can be taken by the random number for random determination (random R) is assumed to be 0 to 598. The total number of determination values is 599, which is a number that the jackpot determination random number can take. The 599 determination values are different numerical values. The CPU 56 extracts the count value from the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the big hit determination random value. To do. It should be noted that since the second big hit game is started when a V win is generated in the small hit game (corresponding to the starting operation state), it is substantially determined that the big hit or the small hit is decided. It is also to decide whether it will be the second big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of small hits. The small hits include a small hit that opens the accessory 20 once in the starting operation state and a small hit that opens the accessory 20 twice in the starting operation state (see FIGS. 16 and 22). The small hit type and the special symbol stop symbol correspond to each other (see FIGS. 16 and 22). In addition, there are a plurality of types of second big hit games that are started on the condition that a V win has occurred in the small hit game. That is, there is a second big hit game with a different number of rounds.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a relationship between a variation pattern and a determination value. However, FIG. 23 shows the number of determination values, not specific determination values. The total number of determination values is 150, which is the number that can be taken by the random number for determining the variation pattern. The 150 determination values are different numerical values. The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the variation pattern determination random number. Decide to use the variation pattern corresponding to the value. That is, the variation time is selected based on the variation pattern determining random number. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 determines a variation pattern according to the type of stop symbol of the determined special symbol.

  Referring to FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, the fluctuation time in the case of the small hit is shorter than that in the case of the big hit without passing through the small hit (the case where the special symbol stop symbol is “8” or “9” except.). That is, when it is determined that the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the start operation state in which the accessory 20 is opened a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the accessory 20 is controlled to the specific game state without being opened. Compared to the above, a shorter time is selected as the variable display time of the identification information. As a result, when the variable display time is long, the player can be reminded of the occurrence of a specific gaming state. Referring to FIGS. 22 and 23, in the start operation state, in the small hit where the accessory 20 is opened twice, the variation time is longer than in the small hit where the accessory 20 is released once. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 selects a long time as the variable display time of the identification information when it is determined that the kind of small hit is advantageous to the player. As a result, when the variable display time is long, it is possible to recall the kind of small hits that are advantageous to the player. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 560 determines to control the start-up operation state in which the accessory 20 is opened a predetermined number of times, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the specific game without opening the accessory 20 as the variable information display time. The same time as when it is decided to control the state can be selected (in the case of variation patterns # 7 to # 9). As a result, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that a specific gaming state will occur during the variable display of identification information.

  Although not shown in FIG. 23, the variation time of the predetermined variation pattern is shorter in the time-short state than in the normal state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23, the fluctuation times of the deviation fluctuation patterns 7A, 8A, and 9A are 15 seconds, 20 seconds, and 30 seconds, respectively, in the normal state. In this case, it is 2 seconds, 3 seconds and 4 seconds, respectively. In other words, in addition to the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state, a fluctuation pattern for deviation in the short-time state with a short fluctuation time is prepared. In addition, the fluctuation times of the variation patterns 7B, 8B, and 9B for specific small hits (small hits when the special symbols “8” and “9” are stopped) are 15 seconds and 20 seconds in the normal state, respectively. Although it is 30 seconds, it is 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 4 seconds, respectively, when the time is short. That is, a specific small hit variation pattern in a short time state with a short variation time is prepared separately from the specific small hit variation pattern in the normal state.

  24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S27) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the special symbol display 8 and the special winning opening is executed.

  When the CPU 56 performs the special symbol process, the start port switch (first start port switch 11a, second start port) for detecting that a game ball has won a start winning port provided in the game board 6 is provided. If the switch 12a or the third start opening switch 13a) is turned on, that is, if a start winning that causes the game ball to win the start winning opening has occurred (step S321), the start opening switch passing process is executed (step S322). . Then, an initial position control process that is a process for setting the position of the rotating body 86 to the initial position is executed (step S323), and any one of steps S300 to S311 is performed.

  The processes in steps S300 to S311 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, it checks the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether to make a big hit or not. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301).

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from when the variable display is started until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variable symbol variation display time. Decide to do. Also, a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302).

  Special symbol changing process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is specially set. It is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to the symbol stop process (step S303).

  Special symbol stop process (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. The variable display on the special symbol display 8 is stopped and the stop symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. If the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big prize opening (step S308). When the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to the pre-release of the accessory (step S304). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbols when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Pre-opening process of accessory (step S304): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 560 executes a process for performing the starting operation, and changes the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) in accordance with the process of releasing the accessory (step S305). Update to the value (5 in this example).

  Processing during opening of an accessory (step S305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. It is confirmed whether or not the specific area switch 66a is turned on, and whether or not the accessory release time has elapsed. When the specific area switch 66a is turned on, the V winning flag is set. When the bonus release time has elapsed, the bonus is closed. Then, the value of the accessory release number counter is decremented by 1, and if the value of the accessory release number counter is not 0, the accessory is opened to perform the starting operation again. If the value of the accessory release count counter is 0, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to the post-function closing process (step S306).

  Post-combination processing (step S306): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A value corresponding to the production time is set in the production time timer for determining the production period, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the production process (step S307). Update.

  Processing during performance (step S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. When the presentation time has elapsed, if the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the big winning opening (step S308). . If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (in this example, 0) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. Control is performed to open the second grand prize port (that is, the accessory 20) or the first grand prize port (large prize port by the opening and closing plate 16). More specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the big prize opening is opened. Also, the execution time of the process for opening the special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is set to a value (this value) corresponding to the process for opening the special winning opening (step S309). In the example, update to 9). Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is set to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to the post winning closing process (step S310). ).

  Process after closing the big prize opening (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Processing to confirm that all game balls have been discharged from the big prize opening is performed. When all the game balls are discharged and there are still remaining rounds and the continuation condition of the big hit game (the V winning) has been established, the internal state (specifically, the special symbol process flag) Is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S308). When all rounds are completed or when the continuation condition for the big hit game is not satisfied, the internal state is updated to a value (11 in this example) corresponding to the big hit end process (step S311).

  Big hit end process (step S311): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 11. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, the game state is set to a short-time state (a time shortening state in which the variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols is shortened compared to the normal state), and the number of short-time times ( The control which sets the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation in which a time-short state can be continued is performed. Then, the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300).

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing a signal line of an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. 26, in this embodiment, the effect control command is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 177 with eight signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. Further, between the main board 31 and the effect control board 80, a signal line of the effect control INT signal for transmitting the capture signal (effect control INT signal) is also wired.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a signal that triggers the capture of effect control command data.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the production control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable means that, for example, the first byte and the second byte of the production control command data respectively. Accordingly, the production control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. The effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIG. 28, commands 8001 (H) to 800F (H) are effect control commands (variation) for designating a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of special symbols. (Pattern commands) (corresponding to variation patterns # 1 to # 6 and # 7A to # 9C, respectively). The commands 8001 (H) to 8006 (H) correspond to the variation patterns # 1 to # 6, and the commands 8007 (H) to 800F (H) correspond to the variation patterns # 7A, # 7B, # 7C, # 8A, #. This corresponds to 8B, # 8C, # 9A, # 9B, # 9C. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the commands 8001 (H) to 800F (H), the production display device 9 performs control so that variable display of decorative symbols is started.

  Command 8CXX (H) (XX = 0 to 9) is an effect control command (display result designation) that can specify the display result (designation of “0” to “9”) of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command. Command). In this embodiment, the data set as XX is data indicating a special symbol stop symbol. It should be noted that the display result command may be configured to designate a determination result (disconnected, small hit or big hit) of the big hit / small hit determination.

  Note that the variation pattern commands 8001 (H) to 800F (H) may designate the disapproval, the small hit or the big hit, and may not transmit the display result designation command 8CXX (H).

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the special symbol variable display (variation) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols and derives and displays the display result. The derived display is to finally stop and display the symbol.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (a jackpot start designation command: a fanfare designation command) that designates the start of a jackpot game. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of a small hit game (starting operation state).

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of the big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, for ending the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending designation command). Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end specifying command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

  Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state designation command) indicating that the gaming state has become a time-short state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) indicating that the gaming state has become the normal state.

  The command D001 (H) is an effect control command (first abnormality) for instructing an abnormal winning notification when an abnormal winning at the first big winning opening (lower attacker) or the second big winning opening (upper attacker) occurs. Winning designation command).

  Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (start winning designation command) indicating that a start winning has occurred. Note that the effect control command indicating that the start winning has occurred may be an effect control command indicating the reserved storage number itself.

  The command E1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) indicating the number of times that the special symbol can be changed (remaining number of times) in the time reduction state. It should be noted that the effect control command related to the special symbol variation in the short time state may be an effect control command indicating the number of times the special symbol variation has been executed in the short time state (including the variation executed when the effect control command is transmitted). . Further, only the effect control command (B001 (H), B002 (H)) for designating the gaming state may be transmitted, and the time-saving number designation command may not be transmitted.

  The command E201 (H) is an effect control command (first effect start designation command) for instructing to execute an effect corresponding to a case where there is no prize for the accessory 20 in the start operation state in the effect after the start operation state. ). The command E202 (H) is an effect control command (instruction for instructing to execute an effect corresponding to the effect after the winning operation has been won in the starting operation state but there has been no winning of V in the starting operation state. Second production start designation command). The command E203 (H) is an effect control command (third operation) instructing to execute an effect corresponding to a case where there is a prize for the accessory 20 and a V prize in the effect after the start operation state. Production start designation command).

  The command E401 (H) is an effect control command (an accessory winning designation command) indicating that a winning for the accessory 20 has occurred. Command E 402 (H) is an effect control command (V winning designation command) indicating that a winning at the specific winning opening 66 has occurred.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIG.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S322. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the reserved storage number is 4 which is the upper limit value (step S41). If the number of reserved memories is 4, the process is terminated.

  If the number of reserved memories is not 4, the value of the reserved memory number counter indicating the number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (step S42). Further, the CPU 56 reads a count value from a counter for generating a random number and extracts a software random number, and reads a count value of the random number circuit 503 to extract a random R (a jackpot determination random number generated by the random number circuit 503). Then, a process of storing them in the storage area in the reserved storage buffer corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter as the extracted random number value is executed (step S43). In step 43, the CPU 56 extracts a random 2 value (see FIG. 21) as a software random number (a counter value for generating a fluctuation pattern random number). In the reserved storage buffer, the same number of storage areas as the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories is secured. Further, a counter for generating a random number for variation pattern and a holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  Further, the display of the special symbol hold memory display 18 is changed to a display showing the value of the hold memory number counter (step S44). Further, control for transmitting a start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S45). Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is used as a pointer. set. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S29) (the same applies to other effect control commands).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. The state where the special symbol normal process is executed is when the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. It should be noted that the case where the value of the special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300 is a state where the special symbol display unit 8 does not display the variation of the special symbol, and the big hit game and the small hit game are It has not been executed.

  In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks the number of reserved memories (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the number of reserved memories is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the reserved memory number is not 0, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = 1 in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S52). Then, the value of the reserved memory number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S53). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55 is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number = n−1. To store. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories is extracted always matches the order of the number of reserved memories = 1, 2, 3 and 4. Yes.

  Then, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number (random R) from the random number buffer area (step S61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step S62). The big hit determination module compares a predetermined determination value (see FIG. 22) with a big hit determination random number, and determines whether to make a big hit or a small hit (special symbol display 8 This is a program that executes a process for determining a stop symbol (display result). It should be noted that determining whether to make a big hit or a small hit also means determining whether or not to shift to the first big hit gaming state or the starting operation state.

  When it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S63), the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag (step S71). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  On the other hand, when it is decided to make a small hit (Y in step S72), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag (step S73). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S74).

  Also, when it is not determined to be a big hit or a small hit (when it is decided to lose) (N in step S72), the special symbol is not set without setting the big hit flag or the small hit flag. The value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S74).

  In this embodiment, when the time is controlled to be reduced, not only the variation time of the special symbol (and the decorative symbol) is shortened, but also the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened. In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric accessory) 15 are also increased. Thus, in the short time state, the occurrence ratio of the third start winning is improved, which is advantageous for the player. The short-time state is called a special game state.

  Note that the special gaming state may be any state that is advantageous to the player, and it is not always necessary to control the special gaming state to the advantageous state such as the above-mentioned short time state. For example, a state where the variation time of the special symbol is not shortened or a state where the probability of hitting the normal symbol is not improved may be used. That is, any one or a combination of the special symbol variation time reduction, the normal symbol variation time reduction, the normal symbol hit probability improvement, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 release rate improvement may be set as the special game state. .

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 reads the variation pattern determination random number from the random number buffer area (step S90). Then, a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table based on the variation pattern determination random number (step S91). The fluctuation pattern table is an area of the ROM 54 in which determination values are set in correspondence with the fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG.

  Here, the CPU 56 selects a variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit / small hit determination (step S62) and the gaming state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 23, a variation pattern table corresponding to the stop symbols (“0” to “9”) of the special symbols determined in the big hit / small hit determination (step S62) is selected. When the special symbol stop symbol is “3”, “8” or “9”, it is confirmed whether the gaming state is a normal state or a short-time state, and a variation pattern table (normally corresponding to the gaming state) The fluctuation pattern table for non-shortening the fluctuation time in the state or the fluctuation pattern table for shortening the fluctuation time in the short-time state) is selected.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in step S91 to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S92). Further, control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S93).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (step S94). For example, a start flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in step S91 is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S95). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S302) (step S96).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S302) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S121), and when the variable time timer times out (step S122), the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (step S303). The updated value is updated (step S123). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIGS. 33 and 34 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets an end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process in step S33 to end the variation of the special symbol, and performs control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol on the special symbol display unit 8. (Step S131). Moreover, control which transmits the symbol determination designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control is performed (step S132).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S133). When the small hit flag is set (Y in step S133), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S134). When the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S134), the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of time reductions in which the time reduction state can continue is decremented by 1 (step S135), and the value of the time reduction counter is 0. Whether or not (step S136A). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (Y in step S136A), the time reduction flag is reset (step S136B). Then, the CPU 56 executes control for transmitting a time reduction number designation command indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed (remaining number of times) in the time reduction state (step S137).

  In addition, it was configured not to be controlled to the short-time state during the small hit game by resetting the short-time flag in step S136B on condition that Y in step S136A, but the short-time flag is reset in step S136B. In such a case, it may be configured to control the time-short state even during the small hit game. In this case, when the game is shifted to the big hit game, the short time flag is reset at the end of the small hit game (for example, the post-function closing process or the effect-in-process). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the control when the V winning is not generated in the small hit game from being complicated (that is, it is possible to simplify the setting / resetting process of the short time flag). it can).

  Further, although the process of subtracting the value of the time-count counter is executed in step S135, the process of subtracting the value of the time-count counter at the end of the small hit (for example, the post-workpiece closing process or the effect processing) is executed. You may make it do.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a small hitting start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S138). Then, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined value in the standby timer (step S139), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the accessory release pre-processing (step S304) (step S140).

  In the standby timer, the position of the rotator 86 is set to the initial position when the small hit game (game in the starting operation state) is finished immediately before. When the game is started, it is a timer that measures the time for ensuring that the position of the rotating body 86 is the initial position. In this embodiment, the process for setting the position of the rotating body 86 to the initial position is started after the immediately preceding small hit game is finished (the payout monitoring time has passed and the game in the accessory 20 is passed as will be described later). From the time when all the balls are discharged) to the time when the small hit game is started next, the performance time shown in FIG. 15 and the next special symbol change period are always included. When the fluctuation period is extremely short, the next small hit game may be started before the position of the rotating body 86 returns to the initial position. For example, if the production time is 3 seconds and the time until the position of the rotating body 86 returns to the initial position is 7 seconds at the longest, the rotating body 86 has a special symbol variation period of 3 seconds. There is a possibility that the next small hit game will be started one second before the initial position returns to the initial position. Therefore, a time (for example, 4 seconds) measured by the standby timer is provided, and when the small hit game is started, the rotating body 86 is always returned to the initial position so that the small hit game is not unfair. To. In this embodiment, the predetermined standby time before starting the driving of the movable member (rotating body 86) is 3 seconds of the production time and a time corresponding to the value set in the standby timer (for example, 4 seconds). Is equivalent to the time when the special symbol variation time (1 second at the shortest) is added, and is longer than the time required to set the rotating body 86 at the initial position (for example, 7 seconds at the longest). The value set in the standby timer may be changed according to at least one of the variation time and the production time.

  Further, by making the sum of the effect time shown in FIG. 15 and the special symbol variation time longer than the time required for setting the rotating body 86 at the initial position (for example, a maximum of 7 seconds). The standby time (a standby timer for measuring the standby time) may not be provided. For example, if the production time is 3 seconds and the time until the position of the rotating body 86 returns to the initial position is 7 seconds at the longest, the variation period of the special symbol is set to 4 seconds or more at the shortest. Even when the small hit game is executed, the position of the rotating body 86 can be reliably returned to the initial position when the next small hit game is started. According to such a configuration, a game control program can be easily designed.

  In step S133, when the small hit flag is not set (N in step S133), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S141). When the big hit flag is set (Y in step S141), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S142). If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S142), the time reduction flag is reset (step S143). Note that the value of the hour / hour counter may be reset together with the reset of the hour / hour flag. Here, the short-time flag is reset in order to prevent the gaming state from being controlled to the short-time state (the state in which the occurrence rate of the third start prize is improved) during the big hit game (during the first big hit game). is there. Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S144). Also, the number of times of opening (number of rounds), which is the number of times that a big winning opening can be opened in the big hit game, is set in the number of times of opening counter (step S145), and the pre-round start time (a new round is started) is set in the pre-round start timer. For example, a value corresponding to the notification time in the effect display device 9 is set (step S146). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winning opening start pre-processing (step S308) (step S147). Note that the number of rounds set in the release count counter is 16 corresponding to 16 rounds (16R) which is the number of rounds per first big hit.

  In step S141, if the big hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the hour / hour flag is set (step S148), and if the hour / hour flag is set (step S148). Y), the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by -1 (step S149). Then, the CPU 56 executes control for transmitting a time reduction number designation command (step S150). Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). If the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (Y in step S151), the time reduction flag is reset (step S152). . In addition, that the value of the time reduction counter in step S151 is 0 means that the fluctuation of the time reduction (100 times) has ended after the big hit game ends. At this time, the time reduction flag is reset to end the time reduction state. Thereafter, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S153).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the accessory release pre-processing (step S304). In the pre-release processing, if the value of the standby timer is not 0, the CPU 56 sets the value of the standby timer to −1 and ends the process (steps S410A and S410B). When the standby timer times out, 1 or 2 is set in the accessory release number counter indicating the number of releases of the variable winning ball device 20 (object) in the starting operation (step S411). Note that the value set in the accessory release number counter is a value (1 or 2) indicating the number of times determined in the process of step S64.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets “5” or “10” as a threshold value in the abnormal winning determination counter (step S412). The threshold set in step S412 is a value that allows the winning of a game ball to the variable winning ball device 20 in the small hit gaming state (starting operation state in which the variable winning ball device 20 opens once or twice) to the maximum. is there. In other words, the opening period of the variable winning ball apparatus (right) 20 per opening is 0.9 seconds. During this period, only about one game ball on average wins the variable winning ball device 20. Therefore, when the variable winning ball device 20 is released once, normally, at most two game balls are won at the time when the opening of the variable winning ball device 20 in the small hit gaming state is completed. . Further, when the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened twice, normally, at most four (2 × 2 times) when the two opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 in the small hit gaming state is completed. ) Game balls only. However, it may happen that three or more game balls win the variable winning ball apparatus 20 within one open period in the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, it is difficult to empirically think that five game balls win a prize when one opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is completed. Also, it is difficult to empirically think that ten game balls win a prize when the two opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is completed. Therefore, when such a situation occurs, it can be considered that a failure has occurred such that the movable members 77 and 78 of the variable winning ball apparatus 20 cannot be closed, or some sort of fraud is being performed. Based on such an idea, in this embodiment, in the small hit game state, the number of game balls detected by the winning combination winning prize switches 71a to 73a is 4 (when the number of opening of the winning combination is 1) or 9 In order to allow a game ball to be awarded to the variable winning ball apparatus 20 until the winning combination is released (that is, up to 4 or 9 winning prizes to the variable winning ball apparatus 20). In 412, a value of “5” is set as the threshold when the number of times of opening the accessory is 1, and a value of “10” is set as the threshold when the number of times of opening of the accessory is two. As will be described later, when the number of detected winning combinations winning switches 71a to 73a reaches 5 or 10 times, it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, and processing for executing abnormality notification is executed (step S588 in FIG. 67). , S589).

  When the variable winning ball device 20 is released twice during the small hit game, a value of “5” is set as the threshold before the first opening, and “5” is set again as the threshold before the second opening. May be set (for example, a threshold value is set after the process of step S436).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds) in the accessory release time timer indicating the release time of the accessory (step S413). And the accessory 20 is made into an open state (step S414). Specifically, driving of the opening / closing motor 75 that drives the opening / closing doors 76A and 76B is started, and the accessory (variable winning ball apparatus) 20 is opened. Also, the in-function game ball number counter that counts the game balls that have entered the inside of the accessory 20 is cleared (initialized to 0) (step S415), and the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the processing during the release of the accessory ( The value is updated to a value corresponding to step S305) (step S416).

  FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are flowcharts showing the processing for releasing an accessory (step S305). In the process during releasing the accessory, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the accessory release time timer has already timed out (step S420). If timed out, the process proceeds to step S438A.

  If the accessory release time timer has not timed out (N in step S420), the value of the accessory release time timer is decremented by 1 (step S421). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the accessory release time timer has timed out (step S422). If time-out has occurred (Y in step S422), the accessory 20 is controlled to be closed (step S432). Specifically, the open / close motor 75 is rotated in a direction to close the open / close doors 76A and 76B. Also, the value of the accessory release number counter is decremented by 1 (step S433). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the accessory release number counter has become 0 (step S434). When the value of the bonus release counter reaches 0, that is, when the start operation end condition is satisfied, a value corresponding to the winning monitoring time is set in the winning monitoring timer (step S437). When the value of the accessory release number counter is not 0, the CPU 56 performs control for releasing the accessory 20 again. That is, a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is set in the accessory opening time timer (step S435). Further, the accessory 20 is controlled to be opened (step S435). In addition, it is preferable that an interval time is provided between the execution of the control for setting the accessory 20 in the closed state (step S432) and the execution of the control for setting the accessory 20 in the open state (step S436). . For example, after executing the control for closing the accessory 20 (step S432), the interval time is set in a timer (interval timer) for measuring the interval time, the timer time is subtracted every 2 ms, and the timer times out Then, control (step S436) for opening the accessory 20 is executed.

  When the accessory release time timer has not timed out (N in step S422), the rotating body / movable part control is executed (step S423). Further, when the first prize winning switch 71a, the second prize winning switch 72a or the third prize winning switch 73a is turned on, that is, when a game ball winning the prize is detected (step S424), a game ball in the bonus The value of the number counter is incremented by 1 (step S425), and control is performed to transmit a prize winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S426A). If nine game balls are won in the accessory 20, the process may proceed to step S <b> 432. Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the abnormal winning determination counter by −1 (step S426B).

  When the accessory discharge switch 85a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the accessory is detected (step S427), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 (step S428). In this embodiment, the reference value of the value of the in-function game ball counter is “0”, but the reference value may be a value such as “1”. If the reference value is “0”, there is a possibility that an illegal act such as turning on the specific area passing switch 66a may be performed even though the prize winning switch 71a, 72a, 73a is not turned on. is there.

  When the specific area switch 66a indicating that the game ball has entered the specific winning opening 66 is turned on (step S429), the V winning flag is set (step S430) and a V winning designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S431).

  In step S438A, the CPU 56 executes the rotating body / movable unit control. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the winning monitoring timer has timed out (value is 0) (step S438B). If the winning monitoring timer has not timed out, the value of the winning monitoring timer is decremented by 1 (step S439), and the process proceeds to step S424.

  If the winning monitoring timer has timed out, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the in-function game ball number counter is 0 (step S440). If the value of the in-game game ball number counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S427. When the value of the game ball number counter in the accessory becomes 0, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-completion processing (step S306) (step S441).

  In this embodiment, since winning monitoring is provided, a game ball that has entered the accessory 20 is surely detected by the first accessory winning switch 71a, the second accessory winning switch 72a, or the third accessory winning switch 73a. Detected. As a result, the game ball won in the V winning area is reliably detected. Further, in this embodiment, a predetermined effect (see FIG. 83) is executed after the start operation state ends, but the predetermined effect corresponding to the game ball entering the accessory 20 and the accessory 20 A predetermined effect corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the V winning area is executed by correctly reflecting the situation of the game ball actually entering the accessory 20 and the game ball actually entering the V winning area. can do.

  As shown in steps S438B, S439, S440, and S441, in this embodiment, all the game balls won in the accessory 20 after the winning monitoring timer times out (after the winning monitoring time elapses) are discharged. It is comprised so that it may not transfer to a post-process closing post-processing until it is carried out. In the case of such a configuration, if a game ball is clogged (stored) in the accessory 20, the game is stopped. That is, unless the player calls the store clerk to discharge the game ball in the accessory 20 (unless the accessory discharge switch 85a is turned on), the game does not proceed. However, even if game balls are clogged in the accessory 20, there is a case where the progress of the game may be allowed. Therefore, the time when the game ball won in the accessory 20 is reliably discharged (for example, if the game ball won in the accessory 20 is discharged in about 5 seconds on average, the game ball is surely removed. When a time of 10 seconds elapses), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-function closing process (step S306), and the post-function closing process is executed. Also good. In this case, if there is no V prize, the effect processing is executed after that, and if there is a reserved memory, the variation of the special symbol is started. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being stopped more than necessary.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the rotating body / movable unit control. In the rotator / movable part control, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the rotator 86 and the movable parts 77A and 78A are in operation (in operation of the rotator / movable part) (step S211). Whether or not the rotator 86 and the movable parts 77A and 78A are operating is determined by whether or not the rotator / movable part operating flag is set. If not in operation, it is confirmed whether or not the accessory 20 has been released (step S212). If it opens, the drive of the rotary body 86 will be started (step S213). That is, the rotating body drive motor 87 is rotated clockwise. Further, the driving of the movable parts 77A and 78A is started (step S214). That is, the drive of the movable part drive solenoids 77B and 78B is started. Whether or not the accessory 20 has been released is confirmed by, for example, setting a flag when executing the process of step S413 and determining whether or not the flag is set in the process of step S212. In addition, a rotating body / movable part operating flag indicating that the rotating body / movable part is operating is set (step S215). In addition, a first operation flag indicating that the rotator 86 is performing the first operation (see FIG. 40A) is set (step S216), and the period during which the rotator operation timer is performing the first operation is set. A value corresponding to 0.5 seconds corresponding to is set (step S217).

  FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing an operation example of the movable parts 77A and 78A when the accessory 20 is released once. As shown in FIG. 39, the movable portion drive solenoid 77B that operates the movable portion 77A is driven until 0.4 seconds have elapsed since the rotating body / movable portion is in operation, thereby blocking the passage of the game ball. The position is set (the position where the movable part 77A of the dinosaur raised his foot as shown in FIG. 3 and the like). Next, the driving is stopped for 0.2 seconds, and the position is set to allow the game ball to pass (the position where the movable part 77A of the dinosaur lowered his leg as shown in FIG. 3 and the like). Thereafter, the position is set again to block the passage of the game ball. Further, the movable part drive solenoid 78B for operating the movable part 78A is set to a position where it is driven until 0.1 second elapses from when the rotating body / movable part is in operation, thereby preventing the passage of the game ball. . Next, the driving is stopped for 0.7 seconds, and the position is set to allow the game ball to pass. Thereafter, the position is set again to block the passage of the game ball. Α shown in FIG. 39 is a period from when 0.9 seconds have passed since the opening of the accessory 20 to when all the game balls that have entered the accessory 20 are discharged. Note that the movable portion may continue to operate during the period α. A certain pattern (for example, 0.4 second drive, 0.2 second drive stop, 0.4 second drive in the movable portion 77A) may be repeated.

  When the rotating body / movable part is operating, the CPU 56 has passed 0.4 seconds from the time when the rotating body / movable part is operating, provided that the movable part operation stop request flag is not set. Then, the drive of the movable part drive solenoid 77B is stopped for 0.2 seconds, and after 0.1 seconds from the time when the rotating body / movable part is in operation, the drive of the movable part drive solenoid 78B is continued for 0.7 seconds. Is stopped (steps S221 and S222). Specifically, when the rotating body / movable portion is operating, the CPU 56 sets 0.4 second to the first timer that subtracts the value when the rotating body / movable portion is operating. Is set, and a value corresponding to 0.1 second is set in the second timer for subtracting the value. When the first timer times out, the drive of the movable part drive solenoid 77B is stopped and the value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the first timer, and when the second timer times out, the drive of the movable part drive solenoid 78B is stopped. And a value corresponding to 0.7 seconds is set in the second timer. Thereafter, when the first timer times out, the driving of the movable portion driving solenoid 77B is resumed, and when the second timer times out, the driving of the movable portion driving solenoid 78B is resumed.

  FIG. 40 is a timing chart showing an operation example of the rotator 86. As shown in FIG. 40 (A), in the first operation, the rotating body 86 rotates 90 ° clockwise from the initial position, and rotates counterclockwise from the position rotated 90 ° from the initial position to the initial position. Repeat the operation. In addition, as shown in FIG. 40B, in the second operation, the counterclockwise rotation is continued. Therefore, in the first operation, there are more opportunities for the notch portion 86A to be positioned above the specific winning opening 66 as compared to the second operation. That is, the probability of winning the specific winning opening 66 is increased. When the rotating body / movable unit is in operation, the rotating body 86 performs the first operation for the first 0.5 second and performs the second operation in the later period.

  Therefore, when the first operation flag is set (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 drives the rotating body motor 87 so that the rotating direction is reversed when the rotating body 86 rotates 90 °. (Step S224). Then, the value of the rotating body operation timer is decremented by 1 (step S225). If the value of the rotating body operation timer is not 0 (N in step S226), the process ends.

  When the value of the rotating body operation timer reaches 0 (when time-out occurs; Y in step S226), the CPU 56 resets the first operation flag (step S227) so that the rotating body 86 rotates at a constant speed counterclockwise. The rotating body motor 87 is driven (step S228). Thereafter, when the first operation flag is reset (N in Step S223), the counterclockwise rotation of the rotating body 86 is continued (Step S228). When the rotation direction of the rotating body 86 is not changed, the CPU 56 drives the rotating body motor 87 so that the rotating body 86 rotates while maintaining the rotation direction.

  When the movable part operation stop request flag is set (Y in step S221), the CPU 56 stops the movable parts 77A and 78A in the movable members 77 and 78 (step S230). That is, the drive of the movable part drive solenoids 77B and 78B is stopped. Further, the rotating body / movable part operating flag is reset (step S231), and an initial position setting request flag is set (step S232).

  The movable part operation stop request flag is set in the post-completion processing (see step S450A). The initial position setting request flag is referred to in the initial position control process in step S323.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the post-completion processing (step S306). In the post-completion processing, the CPU 56 sets a movable part operation stop request flag referred to in the rotating body / movable part control (step S450A). In addition, after closing the accessory 20, when the number of winning and discharging game balls in the accessory 20 becomes equal (when the value of the game ball number counter in the accessory becomes 0), the operation of the movable part is stopped. A request flag may be set. This is to prevent an illegal act of aiming for a V prize by retaining a game ball in the accessory 20.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes the rotating body / movable unit control shown in FIG. 38 (step S450B). Thereby, the process of steps S230 to S232 shown in FIG. 38 is executed, and the process of stopping the movable parts 77A and 78A is executed. Further, control for transmitting a small hitting end designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S451). Further, control for transmitting an effect start designation command (first effect start designation command, second effect start designation command or third effect start designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (steps S452 to S456).

  Here, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first effect start designation command when no game ball is won in the accessory 20 in the starting operation state (N in Step S452) (Step S453). The fact that no game ball has won the prize 20 is set, for example, by setting an internal flag indicating that the game ball has won in the process of step S425 (a process of incrementing the game ball number counter in the prize by 1). This can be determined by the fact that the flag was not set.

  Further, when one or more game balls are won in the accessory 20 (Y in step S452), if the V winning flag is not set, that is, if no V winning is generated (in step S454). N), CPU56 performs control which transmits the 2nd production start specification command (Step S455).

  If the V winning flag is set, that is, if a V winning is generated (Y in step S454), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a third effect start designation command (step S456).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize winning switches 71a to 73a are turned on (step S457A). S457B).

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the production time (3 seconds in this example) in the production timer (step S458), and sets the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the production process (step S307). (Step S459).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the initial position control process in step S323. In the initial position control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the initial position setting flag is set (step S241). If it is set (Y in step S241), the process proceeds to step S246. If it is not set (N in step S241), it is confirmed whether or not the initial position setting request flag is set (step S242). If it is not set (N in step S242), the process is terminated. If it is set (Y in step S242), the initial position setting request flag is reset (step S243), and driving of the rotating body motor 87 is started to rotate the rotating body 86 (step S244). If the rotating body motor 87 is already being driven, the CPU 56 continues the driving. Further, an initial position setting flag is set (step S245).

  When the first position sensor 87a is turned on (a detection signal is output from the first position sensor 87a) (Y in step S246), the CPU 56 sets the rotation body motor 87 to stop the rotation of the rotation body 86. The driving is stopped (step S247). In addition, the initial position setting flag is reset (step S248). Note that the value of the standby timer may be cleared when Y in step S248. According to this configuration, the transition to the small hit gaming state is not waited for an unnecessarily long time, and the game progresses smoothly.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the mid-effect process (step S307). In the processing during the performance, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the prize winning switches 71a to 73a are turned on (step S460A). (Step S460B). Next, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the production time timer by -1 (step S461A). When the value of the performance time timer becomes 0, that is, when the performance time timer times out (Y in step S461B), it is confirmed whether or not the V winning flag is set (step S462). When the V winning flag is not set (N in Step S462), the CPU 56 sets a value of “3” that is a threshold value in the normal state in the abnormal winning determination counter (Step S469). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (Step S300) (Step S470).

  When the V winning flag is set (Y in step S462), the CPU 56 resets the V winning flag (step S463), and the number of times of opening that is the number of times that the big winning opening can be opened in the big hit game in the opening number counter ( Round number) is set (step S464). In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 22, 3 times (3R), 7 times (7R), and 11 times (11R) are set as the number of times of opening (number of rounds) according to the stop symbol of the special symbol. . Then, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to a pre-round start time (a time for which, for example, the effect display device 9 notifies that a new round is started) in the pre-round start timer (step S465). Also, a big hit flag is set (step S466), and a control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S467). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S308) (step S468).

  In the process of opening the bonuses and the process after closing the bonuses in this embodiment, the prize monitoring time (from the time when the game ball enters the bonus 20 the game balls are played by the prize winning switches 71a, 72a, 73a). On the condition that the time until it is detected by either of them has passed (Y in Step S438B) and all the game balls that have entered the accessory 20 have been discharged (Step S440). Y), the process proceeds to the post-completion processing (step S441). However, there is a possibility that the winning of the game ball to the accessory 20 is detected by any of the accessory winning switches 71a, 72a, 73a after the winning monitoring time elapses. Therefore, when the winning monitoring time has elapsed in the process during opening of the accessory (Y in step S438B), the process is shifted to the process after closing the accessory (step S441). (Prize monitoring time in post-closing process), the winning of the game ball to the accessory 20 is monitored, the discharge of the game ball from the accessory 20 is monitored, and the occurrence of the V winning is further monitored (in steps S424 to S431) (Corresponding processing) may be executed. In this case, in the processing after closing the accessory, when there is no winning game ball to the accessory 20, when all the gaming balls winning the accessory 20 are discharged without winning V, or when winning V Shifts to the in-effect process after a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, in the post-completion processing, if it is not possible to detect the discharge of all the game balls won in the accessory 20 within a predetermined time, it is assumed that, for example, an abnormality has occurred and that effect is notified. Good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably detect the winning and discharging of the accessory 20, and if the winning and discharging numbers of the accessory 20 do not match, that effect Can be made to recognize the occurrence of abnormality.

  In addition, when the winning monitoring time has elapsed in the process during opening of an accessory (Y in step S438B), the process proceeds to a process after closing an accessory (step S441). (Discharge monitoring time in post-processing), the discharge of game balls from the accessory 20 and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a V prize (a process corresponding to steps S427 to S431) may be executed. . In the case of this configuration, the winning detection of the game ball to the accessory 20 is performed within the winning monitoring time in the process of releasing the bonus, and the discharging of the gaming ball from the bonus 20 is the winning monitoring time in the process of releasing the bonus And it will be performed over the total time of the discharge monitoring time in the post-process closing. In this case as well, in the post-completion processing, when there is no game ball winning in the accessory 20, when all game balls winning in the accessory 20 are discharged without winning V, or in the V winning When it is done, after the predetermined time elapses, the process is shifted to the production process. On the other hand, in the post-completion processing, if it is not possible to detect the discharge of all the game balls won in the accessory 20 within a predetermined time, it is assumed that, for example, an abnormality has occurred and that effect is notified. Good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably detect winnings and discharges to the accessory 20, and if the winnings and discharges to the accessory 20 do not match, this is indicated. Notification can be made to recognize the occurrence of an abnormality.

  In addition, when the winning monitoring time has elapsed in the process during the opening of an accessory (Y in step S438B), the process is shifted to a process after closing an accessory (step S441). When the process (winning monitoring time in the process) elapses, the process is shifted to the effecting process. In the effecting process, the game ball is monitored for a predetermined time (the winning monitoring time in the effecting process) and the game 20 is won. It may be configured to monitor the discharge of game balls from 20 and to perform the process of monitoring the occurrence of a V prize (a process corresponding to steps S424 to S431). In the case of this configuration, the winning detection of the game ball to the accessory 20 is performed over the total time of the winning monitoring time in the processing during the opening of the winning combination, the winning monitoring time in the processing after the closing of the winning combination, and the winning monitoring time in the processing during the performance. The game ball is also discharged from the winning combination 20 over the total time of the winning monitoring time in the processing during the opening of the winning combination, the winning monitoring time in the processing after the closing of the winning combination, and the winning monitoring time in the processing during the performance. It will be. It should be noted that only for the detection of the winning of a game ball to the accessory 20, the total time of the winning monitoring time in the processing during the opening of the winning combination or the winning monitoring time in the processing during the opening of the winning combination and the winning monitoring time in the processing after the closing of the accessory It may be performed within. Also in this case, when there is no game ball winning in the role 20 in the effect processing, when all the game balls winning in the role 20 are discharged without winning V or when winning V Shifts to the in-effect process after a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, in the post-completion processing, if it is not possible to detect the discharge of all the game balls won in the accessory 20 within a predetermined time, it is assumed that, for example, an abnormality has occurred and that effect is notified. Good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to more reliably detect winnings and discharges to the accessory 20, and if the winnings and discharges to the accessory 20 do not match, this is indicated. Notification can be made to recognize the occurrence of an abnormality.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S308) executed before each round in the big hit game (the first big hit game and the second big hit game). In the pre-opening process for the special winning opening, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display command for opening the special winning opening if it has not transmitted the display command for opening the special winning opening (steps S470 and S471). Also, the value of the timer before the round start is decremented by 1 (step S472). When the timer before the round starts time-out (the value of the timer before the round start is 0) (step S473), the CPU 56 determines the big win type (16R first big hit, 3R second big hit, 7R second big hit) in the abnormal winning determination counter. , 11R second big hit) is set (step S474).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, “192” is set as the threshold value corresponding to the 16-round first big hit gaming state. The threshold value corresponding to the 16th round of the first big hit gaming state is a value that allows the maximum winning of the game ball to the first big winning opening (lower big winning opening) during the 16th round of the first big winning gaming state. That is, in this embodiment, since 10 game balls are awarded to the first big winning opening per round, it is usually 16 rounds (16 first rounds in the first big winning gaming state). When the grand prize opening is finished, 160 (10 × 16 rounds) game balls are awarded. However, there is a case where the game ball wins the first grand prize opening after the count switch 23 detects the winning of the tenth game ball to the first big prize opening until the first big winning opening is closed. is there. In this case, ten or more game balls will win the first grand prize opening in one round, and 160 or more game balls will win the first big prize when 16 rounds in the first big hit game state are completed. There is a possibility of winning in the mouth. On the other hand, in all 16 rounds, it is experiential that 12 or more game balls per round win the first grand prize opening (that is, 192 game balls win the first big prize opening in 16 rounds). It is hard to think about. Therefore, when such a situation occurs, it can be considered that a failure has occurred such that the opening / closing plate of the first prize winning opening does not close or that some sort of fraud is being performed. Based on such an idea, in this embodiment, in the first big hit gaming state of 16 rounds, the number of detected game balls by the count switch 23 is up to 191 times (that is, the number of winnings to the first big prize opening is 191). In step S474, a value of “192” is set as the threshold value in order to allow the game ball to be awarded to the first big prize opening. As will be described later, when the number of detections of the count switch 23 reaches 192 times, it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, and processing for executing abnormality notification is executed (see steps S588 and S589 in FIG. 67).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 45, “36” is set as the threshold value according to the second big hit gaming state of 3 rounds, “84” is set as the threshold value according to the second big hit gaming state of 7 rounds, “132” is set as a threshold value according to the second big hit game state of the round. The thresholds according to the second big hit game state of 3 rounds, 7 rounds, or 11 rounds are the second big winning points in the second big hit game state of 3 rounds, 7 rounds, or 11 rounds (upper big winning points, variable, respectively) This is a value that allows the winning of a game ball to the winning ball apparatus 20 and the role) to the maximum extent. In other words, in this embodiment, ten game balls are awarded to the second big winning opening per round. Therefore, in the case of the second big hit of three rounds, the game is normally in the second big winning game state. 30 rounds (10 pieces × 3 rounds) of the game balls are won at the end of 3 rounds (opening the 3rd second big prize opening). In addition, in the case of the second big hit of 7 rounds, usually 70 pieces (10 × 7 rounds) at the time when the 7 rounds in the second big hit game state (7 times the second big winning opening is opened) are finished. A game ball wins. In addition, in the case of the second big hit of 11 rounds, usually 110 pieces (10 pieces × 11 rounds) at the time when the 11 rounds in the second big hit game state (the opening of the 11th second big prize opening) are completed. A game ball wins.

  However, the game balls become the second grand prize opening after the winning prize winning switches 71a to 73a detect that the tenth game ball has won the second grand prize winning opening. You may win a prize. In this case, 10 or more game balls will win the second grand prize opening in one round, and 30 or more game balls will win the second big prize when the third round in the second big hit gaming state is completed. When seven rounds in the second jackpot gaming state are finished and 70 or more game balls have won the second big prize mouth and eleven rounds in the second jackpot gaming state are finished, 110 There is a possibility that more than one game ball will win the second grand prize opening. On the other hand, in all rounds, 12 or more game balls per round will win the second grand prize opening (that is, 36 in 3 rounds, 84 in 7 rounds, 132 in 11 rounds) It ’s hard to think of it as an experience. Therefore, when such a situation occurs, it can be considered that a failure has occurred such that the movable members 77 and 78 of the second grand prize winning opening are not closed, or that some fraudulent act is being performed. Based on such an idea, in this embodiment, in the second big hit gaming state, the number of detected game balls by the winning combination winning switches 71a to 73a is 35 times (when 3 rounds), 83 times (when 7 rounds) ) Or 131 times (in the case of 11 rounds) (that is, up to 35, 83 or 131 winning prizes in the second grand prize opening) in order to allow the winning of game balls to the second big prize opening In step S474, a value of “36”, “84”, or “132” is set as the threshold value. As will be described later, when the number of detections of the prize winning switches 71a to 73a reaches 36, 84, or 132 times, it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, and processing for executing abnormality notification is executed (FIG. 67). Steps S588 and S589 of FIG.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter (step S475A). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to zero. Then, a value corresponding to the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set in the opening time timer (step S475B). In addition, the special winning opening (act) is controlled to be open. Specifically, in the round in which the first grand prize opening (large prize opening by the opening / closing plate 16) is opened, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the opening / closing plate 16 (steps S476, S477). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening open process (step S309) (step S478). Further, in the round in which the second grand prize winning opening (the accessory 20) is opened, the open / close motor 75 is driven to open the open doors 76A and 76B (steps S476 and S479). Further, the in-function game ball number counter for counting the game balls won in the accessory 20 is cleared (initialized to 0) (step S480), and the process proceeds to step S478.

  In this embodiment, when the second big hit occurs, it is configured so that the second big winning opening (the accessory 20) is kept open during the round, but it is not limited to such a configuration. The second big prize opening may be configured to repeatedly open and close during the round. That is, the opening / closing operation in which the second grand prize opening is opened for 0.9 seconds and then closed for 0.9 seconds may be repeatedly executed during the round (29 seconds). In this case, the number of game balls won in the second grand prize opening during one round changes (decreases) depending on whether the second big prize opening continues to open or the second major prize opening repeatedly opens and closes. )it is conceivable that. Therefore, the threshold value set in step S474 must also be set to a value different from the threshold value when the second big prize opening keeps open.

  In this embodiment, when the first big hit occurs, the first big winning opening is configured to be opened for a predetermined round (16 rounds). The first grand prize opening may be opened in the round, and the second big prize opening may be opened in another round. For example, the odd number round may open the first big prize opening, and the even number round may open the second big prize opening. In this embodiment, when the second big hit occurs, the second big prize opening is configured to be opened for a predetermined round (3 rounds, 7 rounds or 11 rounds). When it occurs, the second grand prize opening may be opened in a specific round, and the first big prize opening may be opened in another round. For example, the odd number round may open the second big prize opening, and the even number round may open the first big prize opening. In this case as well, a threshold value (maximum number of winnings that allow winning to the first and second prize winning openings) according to the number of times and the opening time of the first and second winning prize openings is set. Set.

  Further, the first big winning opening may be opened when any of the first big hit and the second big hit occurs. Also in this case, a threshold value (maximum number of winnings that allows winning to the first big winning opening) is set according to the number of times and the opening time of the first big winning opening.

  46 and 47 are flowcharts showing the special winning opening opening process (step S309). In the big prize opening opening process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first big prize opening is being opened (step S480). If the first big prize opening has been opened, the process proceeds to step S481B.

  When the first big prize opening is not opened (when the second big prize opening is opened), it is confirmed whether or not the opening time timer has timed out (step S481A). If the open time timer has timed out (Y in step S481A), the process proceeds to step S497A. If the opening time timer has not timed out (N in step S481A), it is confirmed whether or not the value of the winning number counter has become 10 (step S482A). When the value of the winning number counter becomes 10, the process proceeds to step S497A. When the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the value of the opening time timer is decremented by 1 (step S483A). If the value of the opening time timer is 0, that is, if the opening time timer times out (step S484), the accessory 20 is controlled to be closed (step S495). Specifically, the open / close motor 75 is rotated in a direction to close the open / close doors 76A and 76B. Further, the rotating body 86 is stopped at the initial position, and the movable portions 77A and 78A of the movable members 77 and 78 are stopped at the initial position (a position where the game ball is not blocked) (step S496).

  When the open time timer has not timed out (N in step S484), the CPU 56 executes the rotating body / movable unit control (step S485). The rotating body / movable part control is the same as the processing shown in FIG. However, here, the rotating body 86 is kept rotating at a constant speed until the second big prize opening is closed and the game ball is discharged from the accessory 20. For the movable parts 77A and 78A, the process of step S222 (see FIG. 38) is repeated every 0.9 seconds until the second big prize opening is closed.

  Further, when the bonus winning switch is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the big prize opening (the bonus 20) is detected (Y in step S486), the value of the game ball number counter in the bonus is incremented by 1 (step S487). Then, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (step S488), and control for transmitting an accessory winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S489). Also, the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is decremented by 1 (step S490).

  When the accessory discharge switch 85a is turned on, that is, when a game ball discharged from the big winning opening is detected (step S491), the value of the in-function game ball number counter is decremented by 1 (step S492).

  In step S497A, the CPU 56 controls the accessory 20 to be in a closed state (step S497A), and checks whether or not the value of the in-function game ball number counter is 0 (step S497B). When the value of the in-game game ball number counter is not 0 (N in Step S497B), the process proceeds to Step S486. When the value of the in-game game ball number counter is 0 (Y in step S497B), the process proceeds to step S499.

  In step S481B, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the open time timer has timed out (step S481B). If the open time timer has timed out, the process proceeds to step S498. If the opening time timer has not timed out (N in step S481B), it is confirmed whether or not the value of the winning number counter has become 10 (step S482B). When the value of the winning number counter becomes 10, the process proceeds to step S498. If the value of the winning number counter is not 10, the value of the opening time timer is decremented by 1 (step S483B). When the count switch 23 is turned on, that is, when a game ball won in the first grand prize opening is detected, the value of the winning number counter is incremented by 1 (steps S486B and S488B). Also, the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is decremented by 1 (step S489B).

  In step S498, the CPU 56 performs a process for ending the round. Specifically, the drive of the solenoid 21 is stopped and the open / close plate 16 is closed (step S498). Then, control is performed to transmit the display command after opening the big winning opening to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S499), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the post winning closing process (step S310). Update (step S500).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the post-close closing process (step S310). In the processing after closing the big prize opening, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the current big hit gaming state is controlled to the first big hit gaming state (step S511). For example, when the big hit flag is set, it can be determined that the first big hit gaming state is being controlled. When it is not controlled to the first jackpot gaming state and is controlled to the second jackpot gaming state (N in step S511), it is determined whether or not the prize winning switches 71a to 73a are turned on (step S512). When it is determined that the prize winning switches 71a to 73a are turned on, the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is decremented by 1 (step S514). When it is controlled to the first big hit gaming state (Y in step S511), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (step S513). When it is determined that the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is decremented by 1 (step S514).

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the opening number counter by -1 (step S515). When the value of the number-of-releases counter is not 0 (N in Step S516), the process proceeds to Step S517. If the value of the number-of-releases counter is 0 (Y in step S516), that is, if all rounds in the jackpot game have ended, the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the jackpot end processing (step S311). ) Is updated to a value corresponding to (step S519).

  In step S517, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to a pre-round start time (a time for notifying, for example, the effect display device 9 that a new round is started) in the pre-round start timer (step S517). The special winning opening or the second special winning opening is controlled to be closed (step S518A), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening opening process (step S309) (step S518B).

  In this embodiment, in each round, a V prize is awarded (a game ball is awarded to the specific area switch 66 formed in the second big prize opening, or a specific area is formed in the first big prize opening. Is configured to shift to the next round without the condition that a game ball has been won in the specific area), but is configured to shift to the next round on condition that the V prize has been won. May be.

  In this embodiment, the waiting time (time for ensuring that the rotating body 86 always returns to the initial position) is not provided in the pre-opening process for the big winning opening, but the second winning opening is opened. About a round, you may provide standby time similarly to the case of a starting operation state (refer step S410A of FIG. 35, S410B). In this embodiment, in the post-process after closing the big prize opening, the prize monitoring time (from the time when the game ball enters the accessory 20 is detected by any of the prize winning switches 71a, 72a, 73a. However, the round for opening the second big prize opening is monitored in the same manner as in the start operation state (see steps S442 and S443 in FIG. 40). Time may be provided.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S311). In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the current jackpot gaming state is controlled to the first jackpot gaming state (step S530). When it is not controlled to the first jackpot gaming state and is controlled to the second jackpot gaming state (N of step S530), it is determined whether or not the bonus winning switches 71a to 73a are turned on (step S531). When it is determined that the prize winning switches 71a to 73a are turned on, the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is decremented by 1 (step S533). When the first big hit gaming state is controlled (Y in step S530), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on (step S532). When it is determined that the count switch 23 is turned on, the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is decremented by 1 (step S533).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S534). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S537. When the jackpot end display timer is not set (N in step S534), control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S535). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S536), and the processing is ended.

  In step S537, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S538). If not, the process ends. If it has elapsed, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (step S539). In other words, after the big hit game is over, the time is always shifted to the short time state.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets 100 times in the time reduction counter (step S540). When the big hit flag / small hit flag (only the big hit flag, or the big hit flag and the small hit flag) is set, the CPU 56 resets the flag (step S541). Then, the CPU 56 sets a value of “3”, which is a threshold value in the normal state, in the abnormal winning determination counter (step S542). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S543).

  Next, bit allocation of input / output ports in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports related to a switch for detecting a game ball in the game control microcomputer. FIG. 50 shows only switches that detect a game ball and that will pay out a prize ball by winning. As shown in FIG. 50, bits 5 to 7 of input port 1 and bits 0 to 7 of input port 0 have magnetic sensors 95a to 95f, vibration sensor 96a, winning port switch 39a, count switch 23, and third switch, respectively. A winning signal switch 73a, a second winning feature switch 72a, a first winning feature switch 71a, a winning port switch 38a, a third starting port switch 13a, a second starting port switch 12a, and detection signals from the first starting port switch 11a. Is entered. The input port 0 and the input port 1 are part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a have been input (for example, an abnormal state confirmation process is provided during the timer interruption process, and the abnormal state confirmation is performed). Check whether or not detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a are input in the processing), and an abnormal state occurs when the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a are input. Judge that In this case, as will be described later, an abnormal signal is output to the hall computer or the like in the information output process (step S30) in order to notify the abnormal state to the outside of the gaming machine.

  The CPU 56 transmits an abnormal state designation command for designating that an abnormal state has occurred to the effect control CPU 101 so that the effect control CPU 101 notifies the occurrence of the abnormal condition based on the reception of the abnormal condition designation command. (For example, an abnormal state occurrence is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, an error sound is generated to notify the occurrence of the abnormal state, and a lamp or the like is lit with a lighting pattern for notifying the occurrence of the abnormal state. Also good). In this embodiment, the door opening sensor for detecting the opening of the door of the gaming machine is not shown. However, if this door opening sensor is provided, whether or not a detection signal from the door opening sensor is input. (For example, an abnormal state confirmation process is provided during the timer interrupt process, and it is confirmed whether or not a detection signal from the door open sensor is input in the abnormal state confirmation process), and the detection signal from the door open sensor It is preferable to determine that an abnormal condition (abnormal release) has occurred. Also in this case, the CPU 56 transmits an abnormal state designation command for designating the occurrence of an abnormal state (abnormal release) to the effect control CPU 101, and the effect control CPU 101 generates an abnormal state based on the reception of the abnormal state designation command. (For example, the occurrence of an abnormal state is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, an error sound is generated to notify the occurrence of the abnormal state, and the lamp is turned on with a lighting pattern for notifying the occurrence of the abnormal state. Etc. may be lit).

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 51, the output port 0 is an output port for a payout command signal (award ball number signal, award ball REQ signal) and a power supply confirmation signal transmitted to the payout control board 37. The high level “1” of the prize ball number signal corresponds to the ON state, and the high level “1” of the power confirmation signal corresponds to the ON state (a state where power is supplied). Further, the low level “0” of the prize ball REQ signal corresponds to an ON state (a state where a payout request is made).

  From the output port 1, a solenoid (large winning port door solenoid) 21 for opening / closing a large winning port (first large winning port, opening / closing plate 16) and a solenoid (normal electric accessory) for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 15 A drive signal for the solenoid 16 is output. Further, from the output port 1, an opening solenoid 75 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 20 (second large winning opening, opening doors 76A and 76B), a rotating body drive motor 87 for rotating the rotating body 86, and a movable part. A drive signal for the movable part drive solenoids 77B and 78B for driving 77A and 78A and an abnormal signal for notifying the occurrence of an abnormal state (abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, abnormal release) are output. In the output port 1, only the abnormal signal is output to the information terminal board 34 (via the hall computer).

  The output port 2 is an output port for signals output to the information terminal board 34 (via the hall computer). From the output port 2, a start port 1 signal, a start port 2 signal, a start port 3 signal, a symbol determination frequency signal, a big hit 1 signal, a big hit 2 signal, a V signal, and an accessory frequency signal are output. The signal output from the output port 2 is a control information signal generated during the execution of the game control process.

  The output ports 0 to 2 are a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, the time when the signal is in the ON state corresponds to the state where the “signal is being output”.

  FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing various signals output to the information terminal board. As shown in FIG. 52, in this embodiment, a start port 1 signal, a start port 2 signal, and a start port 3 signal are sent from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 to the information terminal board 34. The symbol determination number signal, the jackpot 1 signal, the jackpot 2 signal, the V signal, the accessory count signal, and the abnormality signal are output by the information output process (step S30).

  The start port 1 signal is a signal for notifying the number of winnings to the first start winning port 11. The starting port 2 signal is a signal for notifying the number of winnings to the second starting winning port 12. The starting port 3 signal is a signal for notifying the number of winnings to the third starting winning port 13 (variable winning ball apparatus 15). The symbol determination number signal is a signal for notifying the number of changes in the special symbol. The jackpot 1 signal is a signal for notifying that the jackpot game is in progress (the jackpot, that is, the special variable winning ball apparatus is operating). The jackpot 2 signal is a signal for notifying that a jackpot game is being played when a combination of symbols (small bonus symbol) that the variable winning ball apparatus 20 is to operate is displayed. The V signal is a signal for notifying the number of passages to the specific winning opening (specific area) 66 provided in the variable winning ball apparatus (right) 20. The accessory number signal is a signal for notifying the number of times the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20 is opened. The abnormal signal is a signal for notifying the occurrence of an abnormal state (abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, abnormal release).

  The abnormal signal is output from a common connector (terminal) of the information terminal board 34 when any one of abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, and abnormal release occurs. According to such a configuration, the number of signal lines between the gaming machine and the hall computer can be reduced, wiring work can be simplified, and processing for outputting an abnormal signal is simplified. be able to.

  In the example shown in FIG. 52, on the information terminal board 34, the signal line of the start port 1 signal from the connector CN1, the signal line of the start port 2 signal from the connector CN2, and the signal line of the start port 3 signal from the connector CN3 One common signal line is connected to the hall computer. Normally, the signal line of the start port 1 signal from the connector CN1, the signal line of the start port 2 signal from the connector CN2, and the signal line of the start port 3 signal from the connector CN3 are connected to different terminals of the hall computer. .

  In some cases, the winning information may be aggregated without distinguishing which starting winning a prize winning gate from the relationship with the performance of the hall computer or the game management of the game store. In such a case, a connection as shown in FIG. 52, which is different from the normal connection, may be performed on the game store (hall) side. As shown in FIG. 52, when the signal line for the start port 1 signal, the signal line for the start port 2 signal, and the signal line for the start port 3 signal are combined and connected to the hall computer, the start prize is received in a short time. If this occurs continuously, the start port signals are duplicated, and each start port signal cannot be recognized by the hall computer. Therefore, in this embodiment, control is performed to avoid duplication of start port signals (see FIGS. 65 and 66).

  Further, in the case where the winning information may be totaled without distinguishing between winning in the plurality of starting winning ports 11 to 13 and winning in the V winning port 66, the signal of the starting port 1 signal from the connector CN1. The signal line for the start port 2 signal from the connector CN2, the signal line for the start port 3 signal from the connector CN3, and the signal line for the V signal from the connector CN7 are connected to the hall computer. May be configured to connect. Also in this case, if the start winning and the V winning are generated continuously in a short time, the start opening signal and the V signal overlap, and the start opening signal cannot be recognized in the hall computer. Therefore, in this embodiment, control for avoiding overlap between the start port signal and the V signal is also performed (see FIGS. 65 and 66).

  FIG. 53 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the start port 1 signal. As shown in FIG. 53, the start port 1 signal is output for 0.500 seconds each time the first start port switch 11a detects the passage of the game ball (every time it is turned on) (becomes on). ). However, if the first start port switch 11a detects the passing of the game ball when the winning information signal (start port 1 signal, start port 2 signal, start port 3 signal, V signal) is output, The start port 1 signal is output after 0.500 seconds have elapsed since the end of outputting the winning information signal. That is, as shown in FIG. 53, when the first start port switch 11a continuously detects the passing of the game ball at intervals shorter than 0.500 seconds, or when a winning switch (the first switch other than the first start port switch 11a) 2 start port switch 12a, 3rd start port switch 13a, specific area switch 66a) detects passage of game ball, 1st start port switch 11a detects passage of game ball at interval shorter than 0.500 second In this case, since three start port signals (start port 1 signal, start port 2 signal, start port 3 signal) are output from the common terminal (connector CN1) in the information terminal board 34, it is based on two winnings. The signals are duplicated, and each winning prize cannot be recognized in the hall computer. Therefore, in the above case, the start port 1 signal is output after an interval of 0.500 seconds from the end of the output of the winning information signal. As a result, even if a winning occurs continuously within a predetermined period (0.500 seconds), the winning information signal based on each winning can be surely recognized by the hall computer. In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of winning information signals, the start port 1 signal, the start port 2 signal, the start port 3 signal, and the V signal are output in this order.

  FIG. 54 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the start port 2 signal. As shown in FIG. 54, the start port 2 signal is output for 0.500 seconds each time the second start port switch 12a detects the passing of the game ball (every time it is turned on) (becomes on). ). However, if the second start port switch 12a detects the passing of the game ball when the winning information signal (start port 1 signal, start port 2 signal, start port 3 signal, V signal) is output, The start port 2 signal is output after 0.500 seconds have elapsed since the end of outputting the winning information signal. That is, as shown in FIG. 54, when the second start port switch 12a continuously detects the passing of the game ball at intervals shorter than 0.500 seconds, or when a winning switch other than the second start port switch 12a (first The first start port switch 11a, the third start port switch 13a, the specific area switch 66a) detects the passage of the game ball, and the second start port switch 12a detects the passage of the game ball at intervals shorter than 0.500 seconds. In this case, since three start port signals (start port 1 signal, start port 2 signal, start port 3 signal) are output from the common terminal (connector CN1) in the information terminal board 34, it is based on two winnings. The signals are duplicated, and each winning prize cannot be recognized in the hall computer. Therefore, in the above case, the start port 2 signal is output after an interval of 0.500 seconds from the end of the output of the winning information signal. As a result, even if a winning occurs continuously within a predetermined period (0.500 seconds), the winning information signal based on each winning can be surely recognized by the hall computer. In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of winning information signals, the start port 1 signal, the start port 2 signal, the start port 3 signal, and the V signal are output in this order.

  FIG. 55 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the start port 3 signal. As shown in FIG. 55, the start port 3 signal is output for 0.500 seconds each time the third start port switch 13a detects the passage of the game ball (every time it is turned on) (becomes on). ). However, if the third start port switch 13a detects the passing of the game ball when the winning information signal (start port 1 signal, start port 2 signal, start port 3 signal, V signal) is output, The start port 3 signal is output after 0.500 seconds have elapsed since the end of outputting the winning information signal. That is, as shown in FIG. 55, when the third start port switch 12a continuously detects the passing of the game ball at intervals shorter than 0.500 seconds, or a winning switch (the third switch other than the third start port switch 13a). The first start port switch 11a, the second start port switch 12a, the specific area switch 66a) detects the passage of the game ball, and the third start port switch 13a detects the passage of the game ball at intervals shorter than 0.500 seconds. In this case, since three start port signals (start port 1 signal, start port 2 signal, start port 3 signal) are output from the common terminal (connector CN1) in the information terminal board 34, it is based on two winnings. The signals are duplicated, and each winning prize cannot be recognized in the hall computer. Therefore, in the above case, the start port 3 signal is output after an interval of 0.500 seconds from the end of the output of the winning information signal. As a result, even if a winning occurs continuously within a predetermined period (0.500 seconds), the winning information signal based on each winning can be surely recognized by the hall computer. In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of winning information signals, the start port 1 signal, the start port 2 signal, the start port 3 signal, and the V signal are output in this order.

  FIG. 56 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the symbol determination number signal. As shown in FIG. 56, the symbol determination number signal is output for 0.500 seconds after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  FIG. 57 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of one jackpot signal. As shown in FIG. 57, the jackpot 1 signal is output during operation of the special variable winning ball apparatus (big winning opening, accessory continuous operation apparatus) (during the big hit game).

  FIG. 58 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of two jackpot signals. As shown in FIG. 58, the two big hit signals are special variable winning ball devices (large winning mouths, when winning) a combination of symbols (small winning symbols) that the variable winning ball device (work) 20 is activated. It is output during the operation of the accessory continuous operating device (during big hit game). That is, when the special symbol display 8 displays the big win symbol and shifts to the big hit game state, the special symbol display 8 displays the small hit symbol and the variable winning ball device (act) 20 operates and is variable. There is a case where a game ball is won in the winning ball device 20 and a game ball is won in a specific winning port (specific area) 66 in the variable winning ball device 20 to shift to a big hit gaming state. This is output during the big hit game in the latter case.

  FIG. 59 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the V signal. As shown in FIG. 59, the V signal is detected every time the specific area switch 66a detects the passing of the game ball (however, the specific area switch 66a detects the passing of the game ball when the V signal is output. In this case, the V signal is output after 0.500 seconds have elapsed since the end of the output of the V signal, that is, as shown in Fig. 59, the specific area switch 66a is played at an interval shorter than 0.500 seconds. When the passage of the ball is continuously detected, the signals based on the two winnings are duplicated, and each winning is not recognized by the hall computer. In the above case, the output of the V signal is terminated. The V signal is output after an interval of 0.500 seconds from the time, so that even if a V prize is continuously generated within a predetermined period (0.500 seconds), each V signal is output. Based on the prize The Ku winning information signal can be reliably recognized in the hall computer.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 52, three start port signals (start port 1 signal, start port 2 signal, start port 3 signal) are output from the common terminal (connector CN1) on the information terminal board 34 to the hall computer. However, the V signal is output to the hall computer from a terminal (connector CN2) different from the terminal of the start port signal in the information terminal board 34. Therefore, even if the output timings of the start port signal and the V signal overlap, the pulses of the two signals do not overlap. However, in a case where the winning information may be totaled without distinguishing between winning in the plurality of starting winning ports 11 to 13 and winning in the V winning port 66, a starting port signal (starting port 1 signal, starting port) (Port 2 signal, start port 3 signal) and V signal are output through a common signal line. In this case, from 0.500 seconds after the winning switch (the first start port switch 11a, the second start port switch 12a, the third start port switch 13a) other than the specific area switch 66a detects the passage of the game ball. However, if the specific area switch 66a detects the passing of the game ball at a short interval, the signals based on the two winnings are duplicated, and each winning prize cannot be recognized by the hall computer. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, when the winning information signal (start port 1 signal, start port 2 signal, start port 3 signal) other than the V signal is output, the specific area switch 66a is activated. Even when the passing of the game ball is detected, the V signal is output after 0.500 seconds have elapsed since the end of the output of the winning information signal. In this embodiment, when there are a plurality of winning information signals, the start port 1 signal, the start port 2 signal, the start port 3 signal, and the V signal are output in this order.

  FIG. 60 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the accessory count signal. As shown in FIG. 60, the number-of-functions signal is output for 0.500 seconds for each opening of the variable winning ball device (right) 20. As shown in FIG. 60, when the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20 is 1, the combination of symbols (small winning symbol) that the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20 is activated is selected. From the time of the display, the combination of the stop symbol display time (execution time of the special symbol stop process in step S303) and the pre-release time (execution time of the pre-release process of step S304) is added. An object count signal is output for 0.500 seconds. In addition, when the number of times the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20 is released is 2, the combination of symbols that the variable winning ball apparatus (object) 20 is activated so that the accessory number signal is not continuous ( The time obtained by adding the stop symbol display time (execution time of the special symbol stop processing in step S303) and the pre-release time (execution time of the pre-release processing of step S304) from the time when the small hit symbol) is displayed. After the elapse of time, the accessory frequency signal is output for 0.500 seconds, and after 0.500 seconds have elapsed since the OFF of the accessory frequency signal, the accessory frequency signal is output for 0.500 seconds.

  FIG. 61 is a waveform diagram showing the output timing of the abnormal signal. As shown in FIG. 61, the abnormal signal includes an abnormal winning at the winning a prize opening (the first winning award opening, the second winning award opening), a magnetic anomaly around the winning a prize opening, a vibration abnormality state of the gaming machine, and a winning a prize opening. Is output for 30 seconds after the abnormal opening is detected. If another abnormality is detected within 30 seconds after the output of the abnormality signal is started, the abnormality signal is output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the last abnormality was detected. In the example shown in FIG. 61, after an abnormal signal is output based on the detection of a magnetic abnormality, the last detected large prize is detected when an abnormal prize is detected at the big prize opening before 30 seconds elapses. An example is shown in which an abnormal signal is output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the detection of an abnormal winning at the winning opening.

  62 to 64 are flowcharts showing the information output processing in step S30. 62 to 64, steps S1001 and S1002 are processes for outputting the start port 1 signal, the start port 2 signal, the start port 3 signal, and the V signal, and steps S1004 to S1018 are performed. It is a process for outputting the number-of-times signal, and steps S1020 to S1030 are a process for outputting one signal for big hit and two signals for big hit, and steps S1031 to S1036 are processes for outputting a signal for determining the number of symbols. is there. Steps S1040 to S1047 are processes for outputting an abnormal signal.

  In the information output process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first start prize, the second start prize, the third start prize, and the V prize have occurred, and the first start prize, the second start prize, the third start prize, When any one of the V winnings is generated, a winning information storing process for storing the generated winning information in a predetermined area (information storing counter corresponding to the starting winning) of the RAM 55 is executed (step S1001). That is, when the first start winning is generated, the generated winning information is stored in the information storage counter corresponding to the first starting winning, and when the second starting winning is generated, the generated winning information is stored in the second winning information. The information is stored in the information storage counter corresponding to the start prize, and when the third start prize is generated, the generated prize information is stored in the information storage counter corresponding to the third start prize, and when the V prize is generated, The generated winning information is stored in the information storage counter corresponding to the V winning. Then, the CPU 56 executes a winning information setting process (step S1002). The contents of the winning information setting process will be described later (see FIGS. 65 and 66).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets an initial value (00 (H)) in the information buffer formed in the RAM 55 (step S1003). Then, the CPU 56 loads the accessory count information storage timer LOW and the accessory count information storage timer HI to the timer values (step S1004). Specifically, the accessory count information storage timer LOW is loaded into the lower byte of the timer value, and the accessory count information storage timer HI is loaded into the upper byte of the timer value. The accessory count information storage timer LOW is a measured value of the time during which the accessory is closed, and the accessory count information storage timer HI is a measured value of the time during which the accessory is opened.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the timer value has timed out (the value is 0) (step S1005). When the timer value has not timed out (N in step S1005), the process proceeds to step S1012. When the timer value has timed out (Y in step S1005), the CPU 56 sets the address of the accessory count information storage counter in the pointer (step S1006), and loads the accessory count information storage counter pointed to by the pointer (step S1006). Step S1007). In addition, the number of times (1 or 2) of opening of the accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 20) corresponding to the small hit symbol is set in the accessory count information storage counter. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, when the small hit symbol “0” is determined, the number of times of opening (1 time) is the number of times of the accessory at the start of the operation of the accessory (pre-treatment of the accessory shown in FIG. 35). When the small counter symbol “1” is determined, the number of times of opening (2 times) is set in the accessory count information storage counter at the start of the operation of the accessory. Then, the CPU 56 reflects the state of the accessory count information storage counter in the flag register (step S1008), and determines whether or not the value of the accessory count information storage counter is 0 (step S1009).

  If the value of the accessory count information storage counter is 0 (Y in step S1009), the process proceeds to step S1020. If the value of the accessory count information storage counter is not 0 (N in step S1009), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the accessory count information storage counter pointed to by the pointer (step S1010). Then, the CPU 56 sets the accessory count operation time to a timer value (step S1011). Next, the CPU 56 sets the upper byte of the timer value as the comparison value (step S1012), reflects the state of the comparison value in the flag register (step S1013), and determines whether the comparison value is 0 (step S1014). ).

  When the comparison value is not 0 (N in step S1014), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the upper byte of the timer value (step S1015), and sets the accessory count output bit position of the information buffer (step S1016). When the number-of-functions output bit position of the information buffer is set, the winning storage information buffer is loaded in the subsequent step S1037, the logical sum of the winning storage information buffer and the information buffer is obtained in step S1038, and the calculation result is obtained in step S1039. By outputting to the output port 2, an accessory frequency signal is output from the output port 2 (becomes ON state).

  On the other hand, when the comparison value is 0 (Y in step S1014), the processing in step S1016 is not executed, and therefore the accessory count signal is not output from the output port 2 and is turned off. At this time, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the lower byte of the timer value (step S1017). Then, the timer value is stored in the accessory count information storage timer LOW and the accessory count information storage timer HI (step S1018). Specifically, the lower byte of the timer value is stored in the accessory count information storage timer LOW, and the upper byte of the timer value is stored in the accessory count information storage timer HI.

  By the processing of steps S1004 to S1018 described above, a bonus number signal corresponding to the number of times the bonus item is actuated is output (turns on).

  Next, the CPU 56 loads a specific area passage flag that is set when the game ball passes through the specific area 66 (step S1020), and compares the specific area passage flag with the specified value (01H) with passage of the specific area ( Step S1021), it is confirmed whether or not the specific area passing flag is a specified value with a specific area passing (step S1022). That is, it is confirmed whether or not the specific area passing flag is set (01H).

  When the specific area passing flag is not set (N in step S1022), the CPU 56 loads the special symbol process flag (step S1023), and the special symbol process flag value and the special winning opening opening pre-processing designation value (“ 7 ”) (step S1024), and it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 7 (step S1025). When the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5 (Y in step S1025), the process proceeds to step S1031. When the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (N in step S1025), the output buffer position of the jackpot of the information buffer is set (step S1026).

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol buffer in which the special symbol stop symbol content is stored (step S1027), and compares the special symbol buffer content with the special symbol pattern in the case of the small hit symbol (step S1028). ), It is determined whether or not the content of the special symbol buffer is a special symbol pattern in the case of a small hit symbol (step S1029). If the content of the special symbol buffer is not the special symbol pattern in the case of the small hit symbol (Y in Step S1029), the process proceeds to Step S1031. If the special symbol buffer is a special symbol pattern in the case of a small hit symbol (N in step S1029), the CPU 56 sets the big output two output bit position of the information buffer (step S1030). When the big hit 1 output bit position and the big hit 2 output bit position of the information buffer are set, the winning storage information buffer is loaded in step S1037, and the winning storage information buffer and the information buffer are logically ORed in step S1038. By outputting the operation result to the output port 2 in S1039, one big hit signal and two big hit signals are outputted from the output port 2 (become turned on).

  By the processing of steps S1020 to S1030 described above, one jackpot signal and two jackpot signals corresponding to the jackpot type are output (turns on).

  The hall computer receives one jackpot signal or two jackpot signals, and these signals indicate that the jackpot gaming state is in effect and that the jackpot gaming state starts directly without going through the starting operation state. It is possible to recognize whether the game state is a big hit game state or a second big hit game state that is started after the start operation state.

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the special symbol stop information timer into the register (step S1031), reflects the state of the special symbol stop information timer in the flag register (step S1032), and has the special symbol stop information timer timed out? Whether or not is determined (step S1033). In the special symbol changing process (step S302), for example, after the process of step S123, when the symbol fixed number output time is set in the special symbol stop information timer and the symbol fixed number output time has not elapsed, the special symbol It is determined that the stop information timer has not timed out, and it is determined that the special symbol stop information timer has timed out when the symbol determination count output time has elapsed (when the value of the special symbol stop information timer is 0).

  If the special symbol stop information timer has not timed out (N in step S1033), the special symbol stop information timer is decremented by 1 (step S1034), and the calculation result is stored in the special symbol stop information timer (step S1035). Then, the symbol fixed number output bit position of the information buffer (bit 3 of output port 2 in the example shown in FIG. 51) is set (step S1036). When the symbol decision number output bit position of the information buffer is set, the winning storage information buffer is loaded in the subsequent step S1037, the logical sum of the winning storage information buffer and the information buffer is obtained in step S1038, and the calculation result is obtained in step S1039. By outputting to the output port 2, the symbol determination number signal is output from the output port 2 (becomes ON state). If the special symbol stop information timer times out (Y in step S1033), the process of step S1036 is not executed, so that the symbol determination number signal is turned off.

  By the processing of steps S1031 to S1036 described above, the symbol determination number signal is turned on every time the special symbol variation stops (stopped symbol is fixed).

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the abnormal signal information timer (step S1040), reflects the state of the abnormal signal information timer in the flag register (step S1041), and determines whether the abnormal signal information timer has timed out (step S1041). S1042). In the abnormal winning notification process, it is determined that an abnormal state (abnormal winning, magnetic abnormality, etc.) has occurred, and a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) is set in the abnormal signal information timer (see steps S590A and S590C). Is not elapsed, it is determined that the abnormal signal information timer has not timed out, and when the predetermined time has elapsed (when the value of the abnormal signal information timer is 0), the abnormal signal information timer has timed out. Determined.

  If the abnormal signal information timer has not timed out (N in step S1042), 1 is subtracted from the abnormal signal information timer (step S1043), and the calculation result is stored in the abnormal signal information timer (step S1044). Then, the abnormal signal output bit position of the information buffer (bit 6 of the output port 1 in the example shown in FIG. 52) is set (step S1045). When the abnormal signal output bit position of the information buffer is set, the information buffer is set to the output value in step S1046, and the abnormal value is output by outputting the output value to bit 6 of the output port 1 in step S1047. Output from port 1 (turns on). If the abnormal signal information timer times out (Y in step S1042), the process in step S1045 is not executed, and as a result, the abnormal signal is turned off.

  30 seconds have elapsed since the above-described processing of steps S1040 to S1045 detected abnormal winning at the prize winning opening, magnetic abnormality around the winning prize opening, abnormal vibration of the gaming machine, and abnormal opening of the winning prize opening. Until then, an abnormal signal is output using the common connector CN of the information terminal board 34. Further, when another abnormality is detected within 30 seconds after the output of the abnormality signal, the abnormality signal is output until 30 seconds have elapsed since the last abnormality was detected.

  FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 are flowcharts showing the winning information setting process in step S1002. In the winning information setting process, the CPU 56 loads the winning memory timer LOW and the winning memory timer HI (step S1101). Here, the winning memory timer LOW is a timer for measuring the time during which the winning information signal is off, and the winning memory timer HI is a timer for measuring the time during which the winning information signal is on.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the prize storage timer (timer for measuring the time during which the prize information signal is off / on) has timed out (value is 0) (step S1102). When the winning storage timer has not timed out (N in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1123. When the winning storage timer has timed out (Y in step S1102), the CPU 56 sets the address of the information count table in the pointer (step S1103), and sets the upper address (7FH) of the work area in the upper byte of the check pointer. Set (step S1104) and load the number of processes pointed to by the pointer (step S1105). The information count table includes an information storage counter area for counting the number of first start prizes, an information storage counter area for counting the number of second start prizes, and information for counting the number of third start prizes. It is a table in which a storage counter area and an information storage counter area for counting the number of V winning prizes are provided. Each time there is a win, the value of the information storage counter (information start counter corresponding to the first start win, second start win, third start win, V win) is incremented by one. The initial value of the processing number is 4 (number corresponding to four information storage counters).

  Then, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the pointer (step S1106), and loads the lower address of the information storage counter pointed to by the pointer to the lower byte of the check pointer (step S1107). Then, the CPU 56 executes the process of incrementing the pointer by 3 (steps S1108 to S1110), and loads the information storage counter pointed to by the check pointer (step S1111).

  Next, the CPU 56 reflects the state of the information storage counter in the flag register (step S1112), and determines whether the value of the information storage counter is 0 (step S1113).

  If the value of the information storage counter is 0 (Y in step S1113), 1 is subtracted from the number of processes (step S1114), and it is determined whether the number of processes is 0 (step S1115). If the number of processes is not 0, the process proceeds to step S1106. If the number of processes is 0, the process ends.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the winning information signals overlap, the start port 1 signal, the start port 2 signal, the start port 3 signal, and the V signal are output in this order. In order to realize such a configuration, the processes of steps S1111 to S1115 are performed. That is, in step S1111, first, the first start winning information storage counter is loaded. When the value of the first start winning information storage counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1113), since the number of processes is not yet 0 (Y in step S1115), the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1111, the second start winning information storage counter is loaded. When the value of the second start winning information storage counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1113), since the number of processes is not yet 0 (Y in step S1115), the process proceeds to step S1106 again, and in step S1111 The information storage counter for the third start winning prize is loaded. When the value of the third start winning information storage counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1113), since the number of processes is not yet 0 (Y in step S1115), the process proceeds to step S1106 again, and in step S1111 The V winning information storage counter is loaded. When the value of the V winning information storage counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1113), the number of processes becomes 0 (N in step S1115), and the process ends. As described above, in the processing in steps S1111 to S1115, when there is a winning at the first starting winning opening 11, the starting opening 2 signal is output until all starting opening 1 signals based on the winning are output. Next, when there is a winning at the second starting winning opening 12, the starting opening 3 signal is not output until all starting opening 2 signals based on the winning are output, and then the third starting winning opening 13 When there is a winning, the V signal is not output until all the start port 3 signals based on the winning are output.

  In step S1113, if the value of the information storage counter is not 0 (N in step S1113), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the information storage counter (step S1116), and stores the calculation result in the information storage counter pointed to by the check pointer. (Step S1117). Then, the CPU 56 sets the winning information operating time (step S1118), stores the winning information signal ON time of the winning information operating time in the winning information timer HI (step S1119), and receives the winning information signal OFF time of the winning information operating time. Is stored in the information storage timer LOW (step S1120). Then, the CPU 56 loads the information output data pointed to by the pointer (step S1121) and stores it in the information storage information buffer (step S1122). Note that the winning storage information buffer is loaded in step S1037 of FIG. 63 executed thereafter, the OR operation of the winning storage information buffer and the information buffer is performed in step S1038, and the calculation result is output to the output port 2 in step S1039. As a result, a winning information signal is output from the output port 2 (the winning information signal is turned on).

  Next, the CPU 56 loads the winning storage timer HI (step S1123), reflects the state of the winning storage timer HI in the flag register (step S1124), and determines whether the winning storage timer HI has timed out (step S1125). When the winning memory timer has not timed out (step S1125), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the winning memory timer HI (step S1131), and stores the calculation result in the winning memory timer HI (step S1132).

  If the winning memory timer HI has timed out (Y in step S1125), the CPU 56 loads the winning memory timer LOW (step S1126), decrements the winning memory timer LOW by 1 (step S1127), and wins the calculation result. Store in the storage timer LOW (step S1128). Then, the CPU 56 sets clear data (00H) (step S1129), and stores it in the winning storage information buffer (step S1130). As a result of clearing the output bit of the winning information signal in the processing of steps S1037 to S1038 of FIG. 63 executed thereafter by this processing, the winning information signal is turned off.

  As described above, when the winning storage timer HI is not 0 (N in step S1102 and N in S1125), the winning information signal is turned on and when the winning storage timer HI becomes 0 (N in step S1102 and Y in S1125). ) Until the winning memory timer LOW becomes 0 (Y in step S1102), the winning information signal is turned off. The winning information signal is checked first for the number of winnings of the starting port 1 signal (the value of the information storage counter corresponding to the first starting winning) (step S1113), and the starting port 1 signal until the number of winnings becomes zero. Is then repeatedly executed, and then the number of winnings in the starting port 2 signal (the value of the information storage counter corresponding to the second starting winning) is checked (step S1113), and the starting port 2 until the number of winnings becomes zero. The signal output process is repeatedly executed, and then the number of winnings in the starting port 3 signal (the value of the information storage counter corresponding to the third starting winning) is checked (step S1113), and the starting port is kept until the number of winnings becomes zero. The three-signal output process is repeatedly executed, and finally, the number of winning of the V signal (the value of the information storage counter corresponding to the V winning) is checked (step S1113). The output processing of the V signal to the winning number is 0 is repeatedly executed. As a result, signals are output in the order of the start port 1 signal, the start port 2 signal, the start port 3 signal, and the V signal.

  In the above-described winning information setting process, a winning with a high priority (for example, a first starting winning) is generated while a winning information signal (for example, a start port 3 signal or a V signal) is output based on a winning with a low priority. Even in such a case, the output of a winning information signal (for example, start port 1 signal) based on a winning with a high priority is waited, and a winning information signal (for example, start port 3 signal, V signal) based on a low priority is received. After all are output, a winning information signal (for example, start port 1 signal) based on a winning with a high priority is output. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and when a high-priority winning (for example, the first starting winning) occurs during the output of a winning information signal (for example, the start port 3 signal) based on a low-priority winning. May be configured to output a winning information signal based on a winning with a higher priority after the output of the winning information signal. Specifically, the check processing of the information storage counter in steps S1111-S113 is always a winning information storage counter with a high priority, and when the value of the information storage counter is not 0, the winning information with the next highest priority is displayed. The stored counter may be checked. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to preferentially output a winning information signal based on a winning having a higher priority.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the abnormal winning notification process in step S23. In the abnormal winning notification process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not an abnormal notification prohibition flag is set (step S581). The abnormality notification prohibition flag is set in a main process that is executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S44). When the abnormality notification prohibition flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S585. If the abnormality notification prohibition flag is set, the value of the prohibition period timer set in step S45 is decremented by 1 (step S582). When the value of the prohibition period timer becomes 0, that is, when the prohibition period timer times out, the abnormality notification prohibition flag is reset (steps S583 and S584).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more (step S585). The state where the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 or more is a state where a small hit game or a big hit game is being played. On the other hand, the state where the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 is a normal state other than during the small hit game or the big hit game.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 4 (a state where neither a big hit game nor a small hit game is played), the CPU 56 receives bits 0 to 3 of the input port 0 (counter switch 23, bonus winning switches 71a to 73a). It is checked whether or not the value of the detection signal input bit from 0 has changed from 0 to 1 (step S586). When the bits 0 to 3 of the input port 0 change from 0 to 1 (that is, when the counter switch 23 or the like is turned on) (Y in step S586), the CPU 56 sets the value of the abnormal winning determination counter to − 1 (step S587). The process of step S587 corresponds to a process of counting the number of abnormal winnings to the big winning mouths (the first big winning mouth and the second big winning mouth) in the normal state.

  After decrementing the value of the abnormal winning determination counter by -1 (after execution of the process of step S587) or when the value of the special symbol process is 4 or more (Y of step S585), the CPU 56 determines the value of the abnormal winning determination counter. Is confirmed to be 0 (step S588). Here, when the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is 0, it means that the number of winnings to the big winning mouth (first big winning mouth, second big winning mouth) has reached “3” in the normal state, The number of wins at the second big prize opening in the winning game state has reached “5” or “10”, and the number of wins at the first big prize opening has reached “192” in the first big winning game state of 16 rounds In the second round of second round, the number of winnings in the second big winning mouth reached “36”, and in the second round of seven rounds, the number of winning in the second big winning mouth reached “84” This means that the number of winnings in the second big winning opening in the second big hit of 11 rounds has reached “132”. In this case, as described above, it has been determined that an abnormal winning has occurred because the threshold (allowable number) at which a winning in the big winning opening is allowed in each gaming state has been reached. Therefore, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an abnormal winning notification designation command for instructing notification of abnormal winning to the effect control board (step S589).

  In the above example, an abnormal prize is awarded when the number of game balls awarded to the big prize opening in the normal state (the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 and the bonus prize prize switches 71a to 73a) reaches “3”. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and when the bits 0 to 3 of the input port 0 change from 0 to 1 (that is, when the counter switch 23 or the like is turned on) (step S586). Y), it may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred immediately (that is, without determining whether or not the number of winnings has reached the threshold). This is because in a normal state, it is not possible for a game ball to be awarded to the big prize opening.

  In the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 49, the switch detection time (the time from when the game ball is won to the big prize opening until it is detected by the count switch 23 or the prize winning switches 71a to 73a) has elapsed. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is returned to zero. Therefore, normally, processing after step S543 is not executed before the game ball has won the big winning opening but is not detected by the count switch 23 or the like.

  As a result of the above processing, when the number of detections of the counter switch 23 and the like reaches three in the normal state, an abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted. Also, the abnormal winning designation command is transmitted even when the number of detected winning combinations winning switches 71a to 73a reaches 5 times or 10 times in the small hit gaming state. The abnormal winning notification designation command is also transmitted when the detected number of the count switch 23 or the like reaches 46 times, 84 times, or 132 times in the big hit gaming state.

  Further, the process of steps S581 to S583 prohibits the start of abnormality notification when the effect control microcomputer 100 is performing initialization notification. Note that the production control microcomputer 100 continues to execute the initialization notification until the period corresponding to the prohibition period has elapsed since the start of the initialization notification.

  In this embodiment, the control for detecting and notifying the abnormal winning a prize winning opening is performed, but the abnormal winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 15 having the third starting winning a prize opening 13 is detected and notified. Control may also be performed (when the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is open only when the third start winning opening 13 is configured to be able to win). In this case, since the control state of the variable winning ball device 15 can be determined by the value of the normal symbol process flag, the CPU 56 does not indicate that the value of the normal symbol process flag indicates that the variable winning ball device 15 is open. An abnormal winning notification designation command is also transmitted when it is detected that the detection signal of the third start port switch 13a is turned on. It is preferable that the abnormal winning notification designation command is distinguishable from the abnormal winning notification designation command transmitted when an abnormal winning to the big winning opening is detected.

  For example, in the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 confirms the number of passages through the gate and determines whether or not to hit the normal symbol and determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol, normal symbol normal processing, various processes during the variation of the normal symbol A normal symbol change process for executing the normal symbol, a normal symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the normal symbol, and a normal electric accessory actuating process for controlling the opening / closing of the normal electric accessory (variable winning ball apparatus 15) after the normal symbol is hit. Execute. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process flag is a value (for example, 3) corresponding to the normal electric actor operation processing in the abnormal winning notification process, and the normal symbol process flag is the normal electric actor operation. When the value is other than the value corresponding to the process, it may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred based on detecting that the detection signal from the third start port switch 13a is turned on.

  In addition, it may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred when a game ball is won at the second big winning opening while the first big winning game is being executed (when the first big winning opening is opened), It may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred when a game ball wins the first big winning opening while the second big winning game is being executed (while the second big winning opening is opened). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit flag is set when the answer is Y in step S585 (when any of the processing before the accessory release to the big hit end processing is executed). When the small hit flag is set, since the small hit game or the second big hit game is being executed, the game ball should not win the first big winning opening. Accordingly, at this time, the winning at the first grand prize opening (count switch 23 is turned on) is confirmed, and if there is a winning at the first big prize opening, an abnormal winning designation command is transmitted as an abnormal winning has occurred. Execute control to When the small hit flag is not set, the first big hit game is being executed, so that the game ball should not win the second big winning opening. Therefore, at this time, it is confirmed that a prize has been won at the second grand prize opening (the turn-on prize winning switches 71a to 73a are turned on). Executes control to send specified command. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably detect and notify an abnormal winning in the small hit game and the big hit game.

  Also, when the number of game balls won in the second grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number during the execution of the first big winning game (while the first big prize opening is open), it is determined that an abnormal prize has occurred. In addition, an abnormal winning occurs when the number of game balls won in the first grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number while the second big winning game is being executed (while the second big prize opening is open). You may make it determine with having carried out. For example, in the above example, only one abnormal winning determination counter is provided, but the first abnormal winning determination counter for determining an abnormal winning with respect to the first large winning opening and the abnormal with respect to the second large winning opening. A second abnormal winning determination counter for determining a winning is provided. In step S412, the value “5” or “10” is set in the second abnormal winning determination counter, and the value “3” is set in the first abnormal winning determination counter. In step S474, when the first big hit has occurred, a value of “192” is set to the first abnormal winning determination counter, and a value of “3” is set to the second abnormal winning determination counter. In step S474, when the second big hit occurs, the value of “36”, “84” or “132” is set in the second abnormal winning determination counter, and “3” is set in the first abnormal winning determination counter. Set the value. Then, during the small hit game and the big hit game (the first big hit game or the second big hit game), the value of the first abnormal winning determination counter is decremented by 1 every time the count switch 23 is turned on. The value of the second abnormal winning determination counter is decremented by 1 every time 73a is turned on. In step S588, it is determined whether or not the value of the first abnormal winning determination counter is 0, and whether or not the value of the second abnormal winning determination counter is 0 is determined. When the value of either or both of the abnormal winning determination counters is 0, control for transmitting an abnormal winning designation command is executed. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to reliably detect and notify an abnormal winning in the small hit game and the big hit game, and it is possible to prevent the abnormal winning from being determined due to erroneous detection due to noise or the like. .

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described.
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S701). .

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and executes a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 executes effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed. In addition, a random number update process for updating a counter value of a counter for generating a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol) is executed (step S706). Furthermore, a notification control process for performing notification using an effect device such as the effect display device 9 is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer in the form of a ring buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 28) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area.

  70 to 72 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 stores the display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S618). . Then, a display result designation command reception flag is set (step S619).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S624). If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is a start winning designation command (step S627), the reserved memory number displayed in the reserved memory number display area (the reserved memory number display area 9c in FIG. 73) on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is set to 1. Control to change the display state of the effect display device 9 is performed so as to increase (step S628). Also, if the received effect control command is a time reduction number designation command (step S629), the time reduction number displayed in the time reduction number display area (time reduction number display area 9d in FIG. 73) on the display screen of the effect display device 9 is changed. Control is performed (step S630).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632A). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols. Also, an initial notification flag is set (step S632B), and a value corresponding to the initial notification period value is set in the period timer (step S632C). The initial notification period is a period in which initialization notification is performed in response to reception of the initialization designation command. The effect control CPU 101 ends the initialization notification when the initial notification period elapses. The initial notification period is the same as the prohibition period set by the game control microcomputer 560 in step S45. Therefore, the abnormality notification designation command is not received when the initialization notification is performed.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit end specifying command (step S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit end specifying command reception flag (step S644).

  If the received effect control command is the first abnormal winning notification designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a first abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag (step S646). If the received effect control command is an accessory winning designation command (step S649), an accessory winning designation command reception flag is set (step S650).

  If the received effect control command is the first effect start designation command (step S663), the first effect start designation command reception flag is set (step S664). If the received effect control command is the second effect start designation command (step S665), the second effect start designation command reception flag is set (step S666). If the received effect control command is the third effect start designation command (step S667), the third effect start designation command reception flag is set (step S668).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S669). Then, control goes to a step S611. When the CPU 56 receives detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a, an abnormal state designation command indicating that an abnormal state has occurred based on the detection signals input from the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a. In this case, in step S669, a flag indicating that an abnormal state designation command has been received is set. In the notification control process described later, it may be configured to notify that an abnormal state has occurred based on the fact that a flag indicating that an abnormal state designation command has been received is set.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 73, the display screen includes a decorative symbol display area 9a, an effect area 9b, a reserved memory number display area 9c, and a short time count display area 9d. The decorative symbol display area 9a may be a fixed region, but for example, the position and size of the decorative symbol display area 9a may be changed as the decorative symbol changes. The effect area 9b is an area in which, for example, a character image is displayed while the decorative symbol is changing, but may be overlapped with another region (for example, the decorative symbol display area 9a). In addition, in the reserved memory number display area 9c, for example, a number corresponding to the number of reserved memories is displayed, and in the time reduction number display area 9d, for example, the number of times that the special symbol and the decorative design can be changed in the time reduction state (the remaining number of times) ) Is displayed as a numerical value.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S808 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the ornament symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S802).

  Decoration symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Decoration symbol variation stop process (step S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the ornament symbol is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Take control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804).

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of big hit or small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit game processing (step S805) or the big hit game processing (step S807). When a small hit start designation command is received, it is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit game in-process (step S805), and when a big hit start designation command is received, it corresponds to the big hit game in-process (step S807). Update to the specified value.

  Small hit game processing (step S805): Control during the small hit game is performed. For example, in the effect display device 9, a display effect corresponding to the small hit game is performed. When the small hit end designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit after-effect process (step S806).

  After-hit effect processing (step S806): The effect after the start operation state ends. When the production period (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed, the value of the production control process flag is set to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) or the value of the production control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S807). Update to When a big hit start designation command is received, the value is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game in-process (step S807), and when no big hit start designation command is received, the variable pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) is handled. Update to the specified value.

  Big hit game processing (step S807): Control during big hit game is performed. For example, when a special winning opening opening designation command or a special winning opening open designation command is received, display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 9 is performed. When the big hit end designation command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end processing (step S808).

  Big hit end process (step S808): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 in accordance with the data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode (a mode for each predetermined time) constituting a variation mode during a variable display time (variation time) of variable display of decorative symbols. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. In addition, there may be data or the like indicating each effect mode (effect mode for each predetermined time) constituting a post-hit effect (effect after the start operation state) or the like. The process timer set value is set to a time during which an effect in the variation mode or the effect mode is performed. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and executes control for displaying the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, or for performing the display effect. .

  The process table is stored in the ROM, but a process table is prepared for each variation pattern corresponding to the variation time and for each type of effect after the start operation state.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception wait process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 reads data indicating the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S840). Further, the display result of the decorative symbol (stop symbol) is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (step S841). In step S841, if the received display result designation command indicates a jackpot symbol (in this example, the second byte of the display result designation command is “7”), a combination of decorative symbols with the left, middle and right aligned ( Big hit symbol) is determined as the stop symbol. When the received display result designation command indicates a small hit symbol (in this example, the second byte of the display result designation command is “0” “1” “2” “4” “5” “6” “8” Or, “9”), the combination (decoration pattern) of “345” decorative symbols is determined as the stop symbol. When the received display result designation command indicates a missing symbol (in this example, the second byte of the display result designation command is “3”), a combination of decorative symbols that are not aligned in the middle left and right (missing symbols: In addition, although the left and right symbols are aligned but the middle symbols are not aligned, it is determined as the stop symbol.

  A process table corresponding to the variation pattern is selected based on the data indicating the variation pattern command read from the variation pattern command storage area in step S840 (step S843). Here, as shown in FIG. 23, a fluctuation pattern command showing fluctuation patterns 7A, 8A, 9A, 7B, 8B, 9B, 7C, 8C, and 9C (fluctuation patterns when a loss, a small hit or a big hit occurs). Since the variation time is long, a process table for executing an effect that makes the player expect a big hit (direct hit big hit) during the change of the decorative design is selected. On the other hand, when a variation pattern command indicating variation patterns 1 to 6 (variation pattern when all of the small hits occur) is received, the variation time is short, and the player is hit big (direct hit big hit) during the variation of the decorative symbol It is not possible to perform an effect that makes it expected to occur. Therefore, in this case, a process table for executing an effect that informs the occurrence of a small hit (for example, an effect that a volcano appears on the screen as shown in FIG. 81) is selected. Thereafter, the CPU 56 starts a process timer (step S844).

  Then, the production control CPU 101 indicates an abnormality notification flag (first abnormality notification flag, second abnormality notification flag, discharge abnormality notification flag, start winning abnormality notification flag) indicating that an abnormal prize is being notified. Alternatively, on the condition that the sensor abnormality notification flag) is not set, the effect device (the effect as the effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) Control of the display device 9, various lamps (light emitters) as a production component and the speaker 27 as a production component is executed (steps S845A and S845B). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis, but the effect control CPU 101 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  If the abnormality notification flag (first abnormality notification flag, second abnormality notification flag, discharge abnormality notification flag, start winning abnormality notification flag or sensor abnormality notification flag) is set, the sound number data The rendering device is controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 except 1 (steps S845A and S845C). In other words, when the abnormality notification flag is set, when a new variable display of a decorative symbol is started, a sound effect corresponding to the variable display is not executed, but an abnormal winning notification is made. The corresponding sound output is continued.

  In addition, when performing the process of step S845C, the presentation control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data 1 to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. That is, control is performed so that the display at that time on the effect display device 9 (notification of abnormal winning is made) and the image of the display effect of variable display of decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device 9. . That is, when the abnormality notification flag (the first abnormality notification flag, the second abnormality notification flag, the discharge abnormality notification flag, the start winning abnormality notification flag or the sensor abnormality notification flag) is set, When a new variable display of a symbol is started, not only the display effect corresponding to the variable display is executed, but also the notification according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (step S846), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S802). (Step S847).

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the decorative symbol variation process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S851) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S852). When the process timer times out (step S853), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S854). Moreover, on condition that the abnormality notification flag (the first abnormality notification flag, the second abnormality notification flag, the discharge abnormality notification flag, the start winning abnormality notification flag or the sensor abnormality notification flag) is not set. The control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (steps S855A and S855B).

  If the abnormality notification flag (first abnormality notification flag, second abnormality notification flag, discharge abnormality notification flag, start winning abnormality notification flag or sensor abnormality notification flag) is set, process data i The effect device is controlled in accordance with the contents (where i is any one of 2 to n) (excluding the sound number data i) (steps S855A and S855C). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the sound production according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued, not the sound effect according to the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

  Further, when the process of step S855C is performed, the presentation control CPU 101 does not simply output a command based on the display control execution data i to the VDP 109, but also outputs a command for performing “superimposed display” to the VDP 109. . Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, not only the display effect according to the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, but also the notification according to the notification of the abnormal winning is continued.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S856), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S858). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (step S857), the process proceeds to step S858. Even if the variation time timer has not timed out, if the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the process shifts to control to stop variation.For example, a variation pattern command indicating a long variation time due to noise between substrates is received. Even in such a case, the variation of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol has ended).

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the decorative symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the confirmed command reception flag is set (step S861). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, the confirmed command reception flag is reset. (Step S862), and control for deriving and displaying the determined stop symbol is performed (Step S863). Then, the effect control CPU 101 causes the effect display device 9 to perform a big hit display (display for notifying that the big hit game is started) or a small hit display (display for notifying that the small hit game is started) (step). S864) Then, a big hit display time timer for determining the display time of the big hit display or the small hit display is set (step S865), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display processing (step S804). (Step S866).

  In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 ends the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbols on the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (see steps S861 and S863). However, if the variation time timer based on the received variation pattern command times out, the variation of the decorative symbol may be controlled to end without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of variable display.

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 decrements the jackpot display time timer by 1 (step S871). If the jackpot display time timer has not timed out, the process ends (step S872). When the jackpot display time timer times out (when the value becomes 0), it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a jackpot (step S873A). When the jackpot start designation command reception flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560 is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the jackpot has been determined to be a jackpot. . In this stage, when it is determined to be a big hit, it is a case where the big hit game (first big hit game) is started directly without going through the starting operation state. The jackpot display time may be changed according to the type of jackpot (difference in the number of rounds, etc.) or the type of jackpot (difference in the number of times of opening, etc.).

  If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in step S873A), a process table corresponding to the first big hit game effect is selected (step S874A), and the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is set. Start (step S875A), and according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), the production device (production display device 9 as production component, various production components) Execution of control of the lamp (light emitting body) and the speaker 27 as a production component is started (step S876A). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S807) (step S877A).

  If it is not determined to be a big hit (N in step S873A), it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit (step S873B). If it is not determined to be a small hit (Y in step S873B), a process table corresponding to the effect during the small hit game is selected (step S874B), and a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started. (Step S875B), in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, various lamps as effect components ( Execution of control of the luminous body) and the speaker 27) as a production component is started (step S876B). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit game processing (step S805) (step S877B). If it is determined to be a small hit (N in Step S873B), that is, if it is determined to be out of play, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the waiting process for the variation pattern command (Step S800). Is updated to a value corresponding to (step S874C).

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect during the small hit game in the effect display device 9. FIG. 81 (A) shows an example of the effect performed at the start of the small hit game, and FIG. 81 (B) shows a case where there is a prize for the accessory 20 in the starting operation state (specifically, a prize winning designation is given). FIG. 81C shows an example of an effect performed when a command is received, and FIG. 81C is performed when there is a V prize in the starting operation state (specifically, when a V prize designation command is received). An example of production will be shown. In the small hit game, the images illustrated in FIGS. 81A, 81B, and 81C change in content (for example, the movement of fumes or the image of animals from the mountain image). Control is performed to sequentially display images that are separated from each other. Further, the effect is also displayed on the light emitter and the speaker 27 in synchronization with the effect display on the effect display device 9.

  In the process of step S874B, a process table corresponding to a display effect as shown in FIG. 81 (A) is selected. In addition, in the small hit game process, when a winning combination or V prize is generated, the effect shown in FIG. 81 (A) is changed to the effect shown in FIG. 81 (B) or (C). In the display effects shown in FIGS. 81A, 81B, and 81C, some images are the same and other portions are different. Therefore, when a winning combination or a V winning occurs, the images can be replaced without a sense of incongruity.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the small hit game processing (step S805) in the effect control process. In the small hit game processing, the effect control CPU 101 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag indicating that the small hit end designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560 (step S821). The process proceeds to step S831. If the small hit end designation command reception flag is not set, the process timer value is decremented by 1 (step S822). When the process timer times out (step S823), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S824). Moreover, on condition that the abnormality notification flag (the first abnormality notification flag, the second abnormality notification flag, the discharge abnormality notification flag, the start winning abnormality notification flag or the sensor abnormality notification flag) is not set. The control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (steps S825A and S825B).

  If the abnormality notification flag (first abnormality notification flag, second abnormality notification flag, discharge abnormality notification flag, start winning abnormality notification flag or sensor abnormality notification flag) is set, process data i The effect device is controlled in accordance with the contents (where i is any one of 2 to n, except for the sound number data i) (steps S825A and S825C). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, a sound effect corresponding to the small winning game is not executed, but a sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification is continued.

  In addition, when a winning combination winning designation command or a V winning winning designation command is received, a process table corresponding to an effect performed when there is a winning combination winning prize or a V winning prize is selected (steps S826 and S827). Specifically, when an accessory winning designation command is received, a process table corresponding to an effect performed when an accessory winning shown in FIG. 81B is selected is selected. When the V winning designation command is received, the process table corresponding to the effect performed when the V winning shown in FIG. 81C is selected. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S828), and the rendering device (production effect) is performed according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Execution of control of the effect display device 9 as a part, various lamps (light emitters) as an effect part, and the speaker 27 as an effect part is started (step S829). Thereafter, the display effect or the like is switched from the effect shown in FIG. 81 (A) to the effect shown in FIG. 81 (B) or (C). It should be noted that “Y” in the processing of step S826 is that only the first prize winning designation command is received and the first V winning designation command is received.

  In step S831, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the effect time (3 seconds in this example) in the after-hit effect time timer for determining the effect time after the start operation state (effect after the small hit). Set. If the first effect start designation command has been received, a process table corresponding to the first effect of the after-hit effect is selected (steps S832, S833), and the second effect start designation command is received. If so, the process table corresponding to the second effect after the small hit is selected (steps S834 and S835). Otherwise, the process table corresponding to the third effect is selected (step S836). . Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S837). Further, in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, various lamps (light emitters) as an effect component. And the execution of the control of the speaker 27) as an effect part is started (step S838), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the after-hit effect process (step S806) (step S839).

  Thereafter, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the first effect start designation command (see FIG. 28) from the game control microcomputer 560, it corresponds to the fact that there is no prize for the accessory 20 in the start operation state. When an effect to be performed (first effect) is executed and a second effect start designation command is received, an effect corresponding to the fact that there has been a prize for the accessory 20 but no V prize in the starting operation state ( When the second effect start command is executed and the third effect start designation command is received, the effect corresponding to the fact that there has been a prize for the accessory 20 in the start-up operation state and the V prize has been won (third effect) Execute.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect after the small hit in the effect display device 9. FIG. 83A shows an example of an effect (first effect) corresponding to the absence of winning for the accessory 20 in the starting operation state, and FIG. 83B shows winning in the accessory 20 in the starting operation state. FIG. 83C shows an example of an effect (second effect) corresponding to the fact that there was no V prize, but FIG. 83C shows that there was a prize for the accessory 20 in the starting operation state, and there was a V prize. An example of the production (third production) corresponding to this is shown.

  The effect control CPU 101 receives the first effect start designation command in the effect period of the after-hit effect based on the process table selected in the processes of steps S833, S835, and S836. Control which displays the image illustrated by (A) on the production | presentation control apparatus 9 is performed. When the second effect start designation command is received, control is performed to display the image illustrated in FIG. 83 (B) on the effect control device 9. When the third effect start designation command is received, control is performed to display the image illustrated in FIG. 83C on the effect control device 9.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 may perform a round lottery effect by performing control to display the image illustrated in FIG. 83D on the effect control device 9 at the end of the effect period. The round lottery effect is an effect for notifying the number of rounds in the second jackpot game. FIG. 83D shows an example in which the game control microcomputer 560 determines 7 rounds by round lottery. In this embodiment, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived because the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponds to the number of rounds. The player can recognize the number of rounds in the jackpot game. Therefore, when the round lottery effect is executed, the special symbol stop symbol does not correspond to the number of rounds, and the game control microcomputer 560 preferably determines the number of rounds by lottery using a predetermined random number or the like. In that case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the result of the round lottery to the effect control microcomputer 100 by a round number designation command.

  It should be noted that the effect control CPU 101 displays an image in which the contents of the images illustrated in FIGS. 83A to 83D change (for example, a rainy image is displayed or a star-shaped image is displayed). Control is performed to sequentially display images that move. Further, in synchronization with the display of the after-hit effect on the effect display device 9, the after-hit effect is also performed on the light emitter and the speaker 27.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the after-hit effect process (step S806) in the effect control process. In the after-hit effect (effect after the start operation state), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S891) and decrements the value of the after-hit effect time timer by 1 (step S892). ). When the process timer times out (step S893), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S894). Moreover, on condition that the abnormality notification flag (the first abnormality notification flag, the second abnormality notification flag, the discharge abnormality notification flag, the start winning abnormality notification flag or the sensor abnormality notification flag) is not set. Then, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (steps S895A and S895B). If the process timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step S896.

  If the abnormality notification flag (first abnormality notification flag, second abnormality notification flag, discharge abnormality notification flag, start winning abnormality notification flag or sensor abnormality notification flag) is set, process data i The effect device is controlled in accordance with the contents (where i is any one of 2 to n, except for the sound number data i) (steps S895A and S895C). Therefore, when the abnormality notification flag is set, the sound production corresponding to the after-hit effect is not executed, but the sound output corresponding to the abnormal winning notification is continued.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the after-hit effect time timer has timed out (whether or not the value has become 0) (step S896). When the time-out has occurred (Y in step S896), if the big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that the big hit start designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560 is set (Y in step S897A), the effect control The CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the second big hit game effect (step S897B), starts a process timer (step S897C), and produces an effect device (effect display device 9, The speaker 27 and the like are controlled (step S897D). Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (step S807) (step S898). When the big hit start designation command reception flag is not set (N in step S897A), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S899).

  Then, in the jackpot end process, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a display for notifying the end of the jackpot on the effect display device 9, and then changes the value of the effect control process flag to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step To a value corresponding to S800).

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a notification screen displayed on the effect display device 9. FIG. 85 (A) shows an example of an initial screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of the initialization designation command. FIG. 85 (B) shows an example of a power failure recovery screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to reception of a power failure recovery designation command. FIG. 85 (C) shows an example of an abnormality notification screen that the effect control CPU 101 displays on the effect display device 9 in response to the reception of the abnormal winning notification designation command, and the variation of the decorative design is started. Also, it is shown that the display of the abnormality notification screen is continued (see the right side of FIG. 85C).

  86 and 87 are flowcharts showing the notification control process of step S707. In the notification control process, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the initial notification flag is set (step S2001). The initial notification flag is set when an initialization designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 (see step S632B). If the initial notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2006. If the initial notification flag is set, the value of the period timer set in step S632C is decremented by 1 (step S2002). When the value of the period timer becomes 0, that is, when the initial notification period has elapsed, the initial notification flag is reset (steps S2003 and S2004).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for deleting the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen in the effect display device 9 (step S2005). The VDP 109 deletes the initial screen or the power failure recovery screen from the effect display device 9 according to the command.

  In step S2006, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not an abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag indicating that an abnormal winning notification designation command has been received is set. If not set, the process proceeds to step S2011. If the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal winning notification designation command reception flag is reset (step S2007), and the effect display device 9 has an abnormality with respect to the screen displayed at that time. A command to superimpose and display the notification screen is output to the VDP 109 (step S2008). In response to the command, the VDP 109 superimposes and displays an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 (see FIG. 85C).

  Furthermore, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating the sound output in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S2009). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (output of abnormal notification sound) corresponding to the notification of abnormal winning is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S2010).

  In step S2011, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the small hit game or the big hit game is in a round in which the accessory 20 is open. Whether or not a small hit game is being played can be confirmed by the value of the effect control process flag. In addition, for example, the received display result designation command (in order to confirm how many jackpot games are played: see FIG. 16 and FIG. 22). And the display command when the special winning opening is opened (to check how many rounds the game is in progress).

  If it is not during the small hit game or the round in which the bonus item 20 is released in the big hit game, the value of the bonus item discharge monitoring timer is set to 0 (step S2014).

  If the game 20 is in the small hit game or the round in which the bonus game 20 is released, it is checked whether or not the bonus winning designation command reception flag indicating that the bonus winning designation command has been received is set ( Step S2012). If the bonus winning designation command reception flag is set, the bonus winning designation command reception flag is reset (step S2013), and the value of the bonus discharge monitoring timer is set to 0 (step S2014).

  When the winning combination designation command reception flag is not set, the value of the winning combination discharge monitoring timer is incremented by 1 (step S2015). If the value of the accessory discharge monitoring timer is a monitoring time value (a value corresponding to the monitoring time: the monitoring time is longer than the round time of the big hit game, for example, 41.5 seconds), the CPU 101 for effect control In the effect display device 9, a command to superimpose and display the discharge abnormality notification screen on the screen displayed at that time is output to the VDP 109 (step S2017). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays a discharge abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 according to the command.

  Furthermore, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating sound output in response to the notification of the discharge abnormality to the sound output board 70 (step S2018). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, thereafter, sound output (output of abnormality notification sound) according to the notification of the discharge abnormality is performed. Then, the production control CPU 101 sets a discharge abnormality notification flag indicating that discharge abnormality notification is being performed (step S2019).

  In the above-described control, during the small hit game or during the round in which the accessory 20 is released, if the accessory winning designation command is not received beyond the monitoring time, the effect control CPU 101 performs the discharge. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and abnormality notification is performed.

  In this embodiment, the CPU 56 receives detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a. When the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f are input, the CPU 56 is configured to transmit an abnormal state designation command indicating that a magnetic abnormality or vibration abnormality has occurred to the effect control CPU 101, for effect control. Based on the reception of the abnormal state designation command, the CPU 101 may execute an abnormality notification based on an illegal act using a directing device or an illegal act using a magnet or the like or shaking a table (game machine). . The production control CPU 101 is configured such that detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a are directly input, and the production control CPU 101 receives the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a. When input, abnormality notification based on cheating using a magnet or the like or shaking cheating (game machine) may be executed.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the situation of the display effect in the effect display device 9 and the sound effect by the speaker 27. FIG. 88 (A) shows an example when the effect display device 9 is performing variable display of effect symbols. FIG. 88 (B) shows an example in which initialization notification is performed in the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 88C shows an example in which abnormality notification is performed in the effect display device 9 and an abnormality notification sound is output by the speaker 27. When receiving the abnormal prize notification designation command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs control to display an abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and outputs the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27. I do. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued. Further, even when the variable display of the effect symbol is finished, the display of the abnormality notification screen on the effect display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are continued.

  The production control microcomputer 100 does not execute the control for deleting the abnormality notification screen and the control for stopping the output of the abnormality notification sound, so that the display of the abnormality notification screen on the production display device 9 and the output of the abnormality notification sound from the speaker 27 are performed. Continues until the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. However, the production control microcomputer 100 stops the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of the abnormality notification screen and the output of the abnormality notification sound are started. You may control. In this embodiment, the abnormality notification is performed by the effect display device 9 and the speaker 27. However, the abnormality notification may be performed using a lamp / LED. In that case, when receiving the abnormal winning notification designation command, the production control microcomputer 100 controls the lamp / LED to blink in a manner different from that in the normal state (when no abnormal winning has occurred). . In addition, even when the abnormality notification is performed using the lamp / LED, the abnormality notification using the lamp / LED is continued even if the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. .

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 does not detect abnormal winnings for a predetermined period (a period during which the initialization notification is executed) after the power supply to the game machine is started, and does not perform game control. The abnormal winning notification designating command is not transmitted from the microcomputer 560. However, the game control microcomputer 560 always detects an abnormal winning when the value of the special symbol process flag is less than a predetermined value (5 in this embodiment), so that the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the game control. If an abnormal winning notification designation command is received during a predetermined period after the power supply to the machine is started, the abnormal winning notification may not be performed. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits an abnormal winning notification designation command when detecting that an abnormal winning has occurred, regardless of whether or not the initialization notification is being executed, so that the effect control microcomputer Even if the computer 100 receives the abnormal prize notification designation command during the period in which the initialization notification is being executed, the initialization notification is given priority over the abnormality notification by continuing the initialization notification without performing the abnormality notification process. You may make it make it. In that case, if an abnormal winning notification designation command is received during the period in which the initialization notification is being executed, the abnormality notification may be performed when the period in which the initialization notification is being executed ends.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when a transition is made to the normal state (when the power is turned on), the big winning opening in the normal state (the first big winning opening, the second big winning prize) A threshold value (for example, 3) that allows winning a prize to the mouth) is set. Further, when the CPU 56 shifts to the small hit gaming state, the standard value (for example, a value indicating one or two) of winning in the second big winning opening in the small hit gaming state (during release). The threshold value (for example, 5 or 10) that allows the maximum winning to the second big winning opening during the small hit gaming state is set in the abnormal winning determination counter. Further, when the CPU 56 shifts to the first big hit game state of 16 rounds, a standard value (for example, 160 pieces) of winnings to the first big winning opening in the first big hit game state of 16 rounds (during the round) A threshold value (for example, 192) that is a value greater than the value and that allows the maximum winning in the first big winning opening during the first big winning gaming state is set in the abnormal winning determination counter. Further, when the CPU 56 shifts to the second big hit gaming state of 3 rounds, 7 rounds, or 11 rounds, the second big hit in the second big hit gaming state of 3 rounds, 7 rounds, or 11 rounds (during the round) A threshold value that is greater than the standard value for winning a prize opening (for example, a value indicating 30, 70, or 110) and that allows the winning of the second big winning opening in the second big winning gaming state to the maximum. (For example, 36, 84, or 132) is set in the abnormal winning determination counter. Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the abnormal winning determination counter by 1 every time there is a winning game ball in the big winning opening. Then, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred when the value of the abnormal winning determination counter becomes 0, and performs a process for executing an abnormality notification. According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine by setting a larger number of winnings in the abnormal winning determination in the small hit gaming state / big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state than in the normal state. In addition, it can be determined by setting a larger number of winnings in the determination of abnormal winning in the big hit gaming state than in the small hit gaming state. Therefore, an abnormal winning can be accurately detected and determined even in various gaming states.

  In addition, since it is possible to make an abnormal winning determination based on an optimal threshold according to the gaming state, it is possible to accurately execute the abnormal winning determination in any gaming state, and to reliably prevent abnormal winning. it can.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines the release pattern (for example, 3 times for 3 rounds and 7 rounds as the number of times of release) according to the transition condition to the big hit gaming state among a plurality of types of release patterns. 7 times, 11 times for the 11th round, 16 times for the 16th round), the opening / closing control of the big prize opening is executed, and the CPU 56 responds to the release pattern according to the condition for shifting to the big hit gaming state Different threshold values (“36”, “84”, “132”, “192”) are set in the abnormal winning determination counter. According to such a configuration, even a gaming machine capable of shifting to a plurality of types of jackpot gaming states with different number of times and opening times of jackpots, the abnormal winning prize is based on the optimum threshold according to the jackpot gaming state. Judgment can be made. Accordingly, in any gaming state, the abnormal winning determination can be accurately executed, and the abnormal winning can be more reliably prevented.

  In this embodiment, the threshold value corresponding to a plurality of types of gaming states is set in the common abnormal winning determination counter, so that the abnormal winning determination process can be simplified and the RAM 55 Reduction of the area can be realized.

  In addition, since it is configured to execute the abnormality notification in the common mode between the case where it is determined as an abnormal winning in the normal state and the case where it is determined as an abnormal winning in the big hit gaming state / small hit gaming state, Need not be provided for the number of threshold values, and the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition, since the threshold value in the normal state is set to “3”, the game ball is blocked in the big winning opening, and the winning of the game ball is detected because the clog is eliminated after the big hit gaming state / small hit gaming state is finished. Even in such a case, it is not determined that the prize is abnormal. Therefore, it can be prevented as much as possible that it is determined that the prize is abnormal even though it is not an illegal prize. In addition, if the threshold value in a normal state is at least 2 or more, the above effect can be realized.

  In the first embodiment, the threshold values are “3”, “5”, “10”, “36”, “84”, “132”, and “192” according to the gaming state. Different values may be used. In particular, it is preferable to set an optimal threshold value in accordance with changes in the number of times of opening and the opening time in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state.

  In the first embodiment, the threshold value in the normal state is “3”, but may be “1”. That is, it may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred when there is even one winning in the big winning opening in the normal state.

  In the first embodiment, the threshold value is set in the abnormal winning determination counter, and the counter value is decremented by 1 every time there is a winning in the big winning opening. The value of the abnormal winning determination counter may be incremented by 1 every time there is a prize, and it may be determined that an abnormal winning has occurred when the value of the counter reaches a threshold value. Specifically, the ROM 54 of the CPU 56 stores thresholds corresponding to the gaming state (normal state, small hit gaming state (one or two times of opening), big hit gaming state (number of big hit rounds)). Then, the CPU 56 increments the value of the abnormal winning determination counter by 1 every time there is a winning in the big winning opening (Steps S426B, S457B, S460B, S490, S489B, S514, S533, S587). 1 is added instead of processing). Then, every time the abnormal winning notification process (step S23) is executed, the CPU 56 confirms the gaming state and reads a threshold value corresponding to the gaming state stored in the ROM 54. Next, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal winning has occurred when the value of the abnormal winning determination counter reaches the threshold value read from the ROM 54. Also, when transitioning to the small hit gaming state (specifically, when Y of step S133 in the special symbol stop process), or when shifting to the big hit gaming state (specifically, in the special symbol stop processing) When the game state is changed from the small hit game state / big hit game state to the normal state (specifically, N in step S462 in the effect processing and Y in step S538 in the big hit end process). In addition, the value of the abnormal winning determination counter is cleared (to 0). Even with such a configuration, as in the case of the first embodiment, it is possible to accurately detect an abnormal winning according to the gaming state.

  In the first embodiment, the special symbol display 8 is configured to perform variable display of one special symbol. However, two special symbols (first It may be configured to execute variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the first special symbol display 8a is used to change the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning port 11 or the second starting winning port 12. Display is executed, and variable display of the second special symbol is executed by the second special symbol display 8b based on the winning of the game ball in the third start winning opening 13. At this time, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously, but one of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this case, variable display of any one of the special symbols (for example, the second special symbol) may be preferentially performed regardless of the order in which the start winnings are generated, or the order in which the starting winnings are generated. Then, variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be executed. The variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously.

  In the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 104, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the big hit / small hit determination (step S62). The ratio of occurrence of small hits, the number of releases in the small hit gaming state (starting operation state), and the number of rounds in the second big hit gaming state may be varied. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the big hit / small hit determination (step S62), the loss / big hit / small hit is determined using the table shown in FIG. 105 (A). When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the loss / big hit / small hit is determined using the table shown in FIG. 105 (B). In addition, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the number of times the accessory is released is two or three times. In S411, 2 or 3 is set in the accessory count counter. According to such a structure, the variation of a game can be increased and a game interest can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, an abnormal winning notification designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 101, and the effect control CPU 101 notifies the occurrence of the abnormal winning. However, when an abnormal winning occurs, the payout of the winning ball based on the abnormal winning may be prohibited. For example, when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred, the abnormal winning is invalidated or the setting of the number of winning balls to the winning ball number counter based on the abnormal winning is omitted.

Embodiment 2. FIG.
In the first embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal winning is based on reaching the threshold in the normal state, the threshold in the small hit gaming state / big hit gaming state (the first big hit gaming state or the second big hit gaming state) is set. In any case where it is determined that the prize is abnormal based on the fact that it has been reached, the abnormality notification of the same mode is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and is configured to execute different types of abnormality notification depending on the type of gaming state when it is determined that there is an abnormal winning.

  As a premise of the description of the second embodiment, in the abnormal winning notification process shown in FIG. 67, when it is determined that the abnormal winning is based on reaching the threshold in the normal state (N in step S585, Y in S586, S588) In Y), an abnormal winning notification 1 designation command is transmitted from the gaming control microcomputer 560 (transmitted at the timing of step S589), and it is determined as an abnormal winning based on reaching the threshold value in the small hit gaming state / big hit gaming state. In this case (Y in step S585, Y in S588), it is assumed that an abnormal winning notification 2 designation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 (transmitted at the timing of step S589).

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing notification control processing in the second embodiment. In addition, since the process of step S2001-S2005 is the same as the process of step S2001-S2005 shown in FIG. 70, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the notification control process in the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the abnormal prize notification 1 designation command reception flag indicating that the abnormal prize report 1 knowledge designation command has been received is set (step S2006A). . If the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag is reset (step S2007A), and in the effect display device 9, the screen displayed at that time is displayed. Then, a command to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen A is output to the VDP 109 (step S2008A). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays the abnormality notification screen A on the effect display device 9 in response to the command.

  Furthermore, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating the sound output A in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S2009A). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Accordingly, sound output (abnormal notification sound output A) is performed according to the abnormal winning notification in the mode corresponding to the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command among the plurality of types of notification modes. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S2010).

  When the abnormal winning notification 1 designation command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag indicating that the abnormal winning notification 2 knowledge designation command has been received is set. (Step S2006B). If the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag is set, the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command reception flag is reset (step S2007B), and the effect display device 9 displays the screen displayed at that time. Then, a command to superimpose and display the abnormality notification screen B is output to the VDP 109 (step S2008B). The VDP 109 superimposes and displays the abnormality notification screen B on the effect display device 9 according to the command.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs sound data indicating the sound output B in response to the abnormal winning notification to the sound output board 70 (step S2009B). The voice synthesis IC 703 mounted on the voice output board 70 reads data corresponding to the input sound data from the voice data ROM 704 and outputs a voice signal to the speaker 27 side according to the read data. Therefore, sound output (abnormal notification sound output B) corresponding to the abnormal winning notification in the mode corresponding to the abnormal winning notification 2 designation command among the plural types of notification modes is performed thereafter. Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets an abnormality notification flag indicating that abnormality notification is being performed (step S2010).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the abnormality notification is performed in a different manner between the case where it is determined that the abnormal winning is made in the normal state and the case where the abnormal winning is determined in the big hit gaming state / small hit gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to notify a game store clerk of the type of abnormality that has occurred.

Embodiment 3 FIG.
In the first embodiment, the first big prize opening (ie, the lower big prize opening) or the second big prize opening (ie, the variable winning ball apparatus 20) is configured to be opened in the big hit gaming state. In the third embodiment, two lower major winning holes (corresponding to the first major winning opening in the first embodiment) are provided, and one of the two lower major winning holes is opened in the big hit gaming state. Is. In the above embodiment, one special symbol is variably displayed on the special symbol display 8 on the basis of winning to the start winning holes 11 to 13, but in this third embodiment, One special symbol (first special symbol) is variably displayed on one special symbol display based on the winning at one starting winning prize, and the other special symbol indicator based on the winning at the other starting winning symbol The other special symbol (second special symbol) is variably displayed.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. In the following embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and can be applied to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1001 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1001 has a glass door frame 1002 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (excluding game boards described later). Is a structure including

  As shown in FIG. 90, the pachinko gaming machine 1001 has a glass door frame 1002 formed in a frame shape. A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 1003 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 1002. Below the hit ball supply tray 1003, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray (lower tray) 1004 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply tray 1003 and a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 1005 for firing game balls. . A game board 1006 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 1002. The game board 1006 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 1006 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 1007 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1006 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 1009 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 1007. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area (see FIG. 43 and the like) for performing variable display of the effect symbols synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  In this embodiment, as the effect symbols displayed in the three display areas of the effect display device 1009, symbols of numbers “0” to “9” are used. During the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbols, the effect symbols “0” to “9” are displayed in numerical order.

  On the top of the effect display device 1009, a first special symbol display (first variable display means) 1008a that variably displays the first special symbol as identification information, and a second special symbol that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information. 2 special symbol display (second variable display means) 1008b. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 1008a and the second special symbol display device 1008b are simple and small display devices that can variably display the numbers “1” to “9” and the symbol “−”, for example. (For example, 7 segment LED). The special symbol displays 1008a and 1008b are configured to variably display a larger number of numbers such as “0” to “99” in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp a specific stop symbol. Also good.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 1008a and the second special symbol indicator 1008b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second start condition which is the execution condition of the variable display of the second special symbol is established. After the game ball has won the first start winning opening 1013 or the second starting winning opening 1014, for example, a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the first special symbol) And a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not executed and a state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time elapses, the display result (stop symbol) Is derived and displayed.

  In this embodiment, the variable display start condition is established by giving priority to the winning to the second starting winning port 1014 out of the winning to the first starting winning port 1013 and the winning to the second starting winning port 1014. I try to let them. For example, when giving priority to winning at the second start winning opening 1014, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed, and the jackpot game is not executed. For example, even when the first reserved memory number is not zero, the variable display of the second special symbol is continuously executed until the second reserved memory number becomes zero. Note that the variable display start condition may be established by giving priority to winning in the first start winning opening 1013. Further, the variable display start condition may be established in the order in which the start winnings are generated regardless of the winnings to the first starting winning ports 1013 and the second starting winning ports 1014.

  On the top of the effect display device 1009, a first special symbol comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 1013, that is, the number of reserved memories (also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). A second special symbol holding memory composed of a holding memory display 1018a and four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 1014, that is, the number of holding memories (also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory). A display 1018b is provided. In the first special symbol storage memory display 1018a, the display color of one display is changed every time there is an effective start winning. Each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 1008a is started, the display color of one display is restored. Similarly, in the second special symbol reservation storage display 1018b, every time there is an effective start winning, the display color of one display is changed. Each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 1008b is started, the display color of one display is restored.

  Below the effect display device 1009, a winning device having a first start winning port 1013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 1013 is guided to the back of the game board 1006 and detected by the first start opening switch 1013a.

  A variable winning ball device 1015 having a second starting winning port 1014 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 1013. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 1014 is guided to the back of the game board 1006 and detected by the second start opening switch 1014a. The variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is opened by a solenoid (not shown) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is kept open for a predetermined time when the variable symbol display result of normal symbols is a hit. When the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is in the open state, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 1014 (easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player.

  Below the second start winning opening 1014, a solenoid (not shown) is used in a specific game state (a jackpot game state) that occurs when a specific display result (a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 1008. There are provided a first special variable winning ball apparatus 1020a that is opened and a second special variable winning ball apparatus 1020b that is opened by a solenoid (not shown). In this embodiment, for example, when a probable variation symbol is derived and displayed as a big hit symbol, the first special prize winning opening constituted by the first special variable winning ball apparatus 1020a is opened, and a non-probable variation symbol is derived and displayed. In the case where it is made, the second special winning opening constituted by the second special variable winning ball apparatus 1020b is opened. In this embodiment, the winning areas are the first grand prize opening (first winning area), the second big prize opening (second winning area), the first start winning opening 1013 and the second starting winning opening. 1014.

  In the following, either the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening, or in the case of comprehensive expression, simply expressed as “large winning prize opening”. In addition, either the first special variable winning ball apparatus 1020a or the second special variable winning ball apparatus 1020b, or when expressed in a comprehensive manner, is also simply expressed as “special variable winning ball apparatus”.

  Further, in this embodiment, different symbols are displayed on the special symbol display 1008 depending on whether the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit. For example, the symbols “6” to “9” are displayed on the first special symbol display 1008a or the second special symbol display 1008b at the probability big hit, and the first special symbol display 1008a or 2 The symbols “0” to “5” are displayed on the special symbol display 1008b. Note that the same symbol may be displayed on the first special symbol display device 1008a or the second special symbol display device 1008b depending on whether the probability big hit or the normal big hit. For example, the symbols “0” to “9” may be displayed on the special symbol display 1008 regardless of whether the probability variation big hit or the normal big hit. The first special variable winning ball apparatus 1020a includes an opening / closing plate and forms a first big winning opening. A game ball that has entered the first grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 1023a. The second special variable winning ball apparatus 1020b includes an opening / closing plate and forms a second large winning opening. A game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening is detected by the second count switch 1023b.

  In the third embodiment, the odd winning jackpot is suddenly opened (the two winning rounds are opened for a short time, and the jackpot game is shifted to the promising state after the big winning game is finished) and the small winning jack is opened for a short time only for two rounds. However, the game state is not changed after the small hit game is finished), but it is also possible to suddenly provide a probable big hit and a small hit.

  A normal symbol display 1010 is provided directly above the effect display device 1009. The normal symbol display 1010 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols. As in the case of the first embodiment, the normal symbol display 1010 may be composed of a 7-segment LED. In that case, “7” is displayed at the end of the variable display in the case of winning. Stop display is displayed, and when it is off, other than “7” is stopped display.

  When a game ball enters the gate 1032 and is detected by the gate switch 1032a, variable display of the normal symbol display 1010 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the left and right lamps (a symbol can be visually recognized when the lamp is lit). For example, if the left lamp is lit when the variable display ends, it is a hit. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 1010 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 changes from a disadvantageous state to a player to an advantageous state when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 1010, a normal symbol hold storage display 1041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 1032 is provided. Each time a game ball passes to the gate 1032, the normal symbol hold memory display 1041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Every time variable display on the normal symbol display 1010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  A decorative lamp 1025 blinkingly displayed during the game is provided around the left and right of the game area 1007 of the game board 1006, and an out port 1026 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 1027 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 1007. A top frame lamp 1028a, a left frame lamp 1028b, and a right frame lamp 1028c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 1007. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (such as a big prize opening) in the game area 1007. The top frame lamp 1028a, the left frame lamp 1028b, the right frame lamp 1028c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  Also, below the left speaker 1027 is provided a prize ball LED 1051 that is lit during payout of the prize ball, and below the right speaker 1027 is provided a ball break LED 1052 that is lit when the supply ball is cut. Yes. Further, a prepaid card unit that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1001 (not shown).

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 1007. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 1007 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 1007, and then descends the game area 1007. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening 1013 or the second start winning opening 1014 and is detected by the first start opening switch 1013a or the second start opening switch 1014a, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. If it can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the end of the previous variable display), the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display 1008a or the second special symbol display 1008b ( Variation) is started, and the effect display device 1009 starts variable display of the effect symbols. If the special symbol variable display cannot be started, the number of reserved memories for the first special symbol reserved memory display 1018a or the second special symbol reserved memory display 1018b is increased by one.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1008a or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1008b stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, in synchronization with the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the effect symbol of the effect display device 1009 also stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the stop symbol at the time of the stop becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), it shifts to a jackpot gaming state. That is, the game state shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to a normal state other than the big hit game state. In a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), a special variable winning ball apparatus until a predetermined time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls wins a big winning opening. Is released. It should be noted that one round in the big hit gaming state is a period from when the special variable winning ball apparatus is opened until a predetermined period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, ten) of hitting balls wins the big winning opening. In this embodiment, for example, in the case of 15 rounds of big hit, the big hit gaming state is continued for 15 rounds.

  The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1008a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 1009 are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 1008b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 1009 are also synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the variable display period is the same. In addition, when the special symbol display 1008a or 1008b stops and displays the big hit symbol (for example, symbols “0” to “9” other than “−”), the effect display device 1009 has the left, middle and right effect symbols. The display is stopped and displayed in a state (for example, “222” or “777”). Hereinafter, the fact that the effect display device 1009 is stopped and displayed in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are aligned is expressed as a jackpot symbol (specific display result) of the effect symbol is displayed.

  When the effect display device 1009 is stopped and displayed with odd number of left and right effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”) (for example, “777”), it is a big hit game In addition to the transition to the state, when the jackpot game state ends, the probability change state (which means a probability variation state, which is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability (ratio) than the normal gaming state when making a jackpot determination, both high probability state and Control). That is, it becomes a more advantageous state for the player in the probability variation state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, when it is decided to make the probability variation internally, and the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol at the end of the variation display of the production symbol as described above (an odd number of symbols in the middle left and right are aligned) When the display is stopped at (), it is determined that a predetermined transition condition has been established, and the state is shifted to a certain change state.

  As described above, of the production symbols “0” to “9”, an odd production symbol that causes a probability variation state is referred to as a probability variation symbol, and an even production symbol that does not cause a probability variation state is referred to as a non-probability variation symbol. . In addition, the fact that the effect display device 1009 stops and displays an odd number of left, right, and right effect symbols is expressed in such a way that a probability variation symbol (special display result) of the effect symbol is displayed.

  In this embodiment, when it is determined in advance that the probability variation big hit is made, control is performed so as to shift to a high probability state and to a high base state (time-short state). In that case, a high base flag may be set separately from the high probability flag, and the variation time may be shortened based on the high base flag. In addition, when changing the gaming state to the probable state, simply changing to a high probability state in which the probability that a special symbol or production symbol will be a big hit symbol is increased, the probability that a normal symbol will be a winning symbol, or a variable prize The probability that the normal symbol becomes a winning symbol without changing the state of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the ball device 1015 and the change in the state of the opening time and the number of times of opening in the variable winning ball device 1015 are high base state (high base flag May be executed on the basis of the fact that the control is performed in a state in which is set.

  For example, when it is a probable big hit, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is likely to start and win (that is, the variable display execution condition in the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 1009). Transition to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so as to be easily established. In the case of the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 1015 is opened is increased or the time during which the variable winning ball device 1015 is in the open state is increased compared to the case where the high base state is not set. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 1010 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 1010 is a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 1010 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 1010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 are increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, etc., and change from an unfavorable state to a player (a state where it is easy to start a winning). To do. It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time-short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 1010 is shortened. In the normal symbol time-short state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is in the open state is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the special symbol time-short state where the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened. In the special symbol time-short state, the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol becomes high (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes fast). As a result, it is easier to win a start (shift to a high base state), and the possibility that a big hit game will be performed increases.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it becomes easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short state and special symbol short state). Transition to a state).

  Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. In this embodiment, the reach display mode (reach) is a variable display (fluctuation display) for the effect symbols that have not yet stopped when the effect symbols that have been stopped constitute a part of the jackpot symbol. And all or part of the effect symbols are in a state of being variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbol.

  For example, in the left, right and right display areas of the left, middle and right display areas in the effect display device 1009, the effect symbols (for example, “7”) which are part of the jackpot symbol are stopped and displayed. The display area of the display area is still in a variable display state, and all or a part of the display area is in a variable display while forming all or a part of the jackpot symbol (for example, an effect display) The variable display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the device 1009, and the variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are aligned.

  In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance is performed with a lamp or sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the effect display device 1009 are called reach effects. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a background display mode of the effect display device 1009 (eg color) May be changed.

  Next, the special symbol process in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as described above, the variation of one special symbol is executed with priority over the variation of the other special symbol.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special symbol process processing program according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the special symbol process is used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the special symbol process is shared.

  In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects the first start opening switch 1013a or the second start winning opening 1014 (see FIG. 90) for detecting that a game ball has won the first start winning opening 1013 (see FIG. 90). If the second start opening switch 1014a for detecting that the game ball has won is turned on, that is, if the first start winning or the second start winning has occurred, the start opening switch passing process is executed. Specifically, the data of the input port 0 is read and loaded, for example, into a predetermined area of the register or RAM 55 (step S1311). Then, the bitwise AND operation of the loaded contents (loaded data) and C0 (H) is performed, and if the operation result is not 0 (step S1312), the start port switch passing process is executed (step S1313). . More specifically, the start port switch passing process is executed when the calculation result changes to a state of 1 (when it is 0 in the determination immediately before 2 ms and becomes 1 in this determination). . Then, any one of steps S1300 to S1310 is performed. C0 (H) is a value corresponding to the input bit of the detection signal from the first start port switch 1013a and the second start port switch 1014a of the input port 0. In this embodiment, the contents of the input port 0 are directly loaded. However, when the contents of the input port 0 are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 by the switch process (step S21), the area (In order to prevent erroneous determination due to noise, when the content of the input port 0 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 over a plurality of timer interrupts, the switch is turned on. A flag may be set, and the start port passing process may be executed when the flag is set). In addition, the processing in step S1312 may be replaced with an operation that performs exclusive OR with 00 (H) after masking bits 0 to 5 of the loaded contents (loaded data) (set to 0). .

  Thereafter, the processes of steps S1300 to S1307 are executed. The processing in steps S1300 to S1307 is as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S1300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, it checks the number of reserved memories (the number of start winning memories). The reserved memory number can be confirmed by the count value of the reserved memory number counter. If the number of reserved memories is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to step S1301.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S1301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. The stop symbol after the variable display of the special symbol is determined. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from when the variable display is started until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variable symbol variation display time. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S1302.

  Display result specifying command transmission process (step S1302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result specifying command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S1303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S1303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S1301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), a special symbol is displayed by the timer (stop time timer). The time (symbol stop time) for stopping the stop symbol is set, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S1304.

  Special symbol stop process (step S1304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, if the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S1305. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S1300. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Pre-winner pre-opening process (step S1305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S1306. Note that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for opening the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening open process (step S1306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S1305. When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S1307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S1307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S1300.

  92 and 93 are flowcharts showing the start-port switch passing process in step S1313. As shown in step S1311, when the logical product of the content loaded from the input port 0 (loaded data) and C0 (H) is performed and the calculation result is not 0, that is, the first start switch 1013a and the first switch In the start port switch passing process that is executed when at least one of the two start port switches 1014a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 inputs bit 6 (the detection signal from the second start port switch 1014a) of the loaded data. It is confirmed whether or not the bit to be 1 is 1 (step S2111). When the second start port switch 1014a is in the on state, the detection signal input to bit 6 of the loaded data is 1 (high level). That is, the fact that bit 6 of the loaded data is 1 means that bit 6 of input port 0 has changed from 0 to 1. That is, it means that the second start port switch 1014a is turned on.

  In addition, the fact that bit 6 of the loaded data is not 1 means that bit 7 of input port 0 has changed from 0 to 1. That is, it means that the first start port switch 1013a is turned on.

  When the bit 6 of the input port 0 is 1, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the start port pointer (step S2112). If bit 6 of input port 0 is not 1, data indicating “first” is set in the start port pointer (step S2113).

  In this embodiment, a reserved memory number counter (first reserved memory number counter) that counts the first reserved memory number (the number of effective winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 1013), and a second reserved memory number (first And a reserved memory number counter (second reserved memory number counter) that counts the number of effective winning balls that have entered the 2 start winning opening 1014). The start port pointer is set with data indicating the address of the first reserved memory number counter or the address of the second reserved memory number counter. That is, the data indicating “first” set in the start port pointer indicates the address of the first reserved memory number counter, and the data indicating “second” indicates the address of the second reserved memory number counter. The start port pointer is formed in the RAM 55. A first reserved memory number counter and a second reserved memory number counter are also formed in the RAM 55. “Formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM. Instead of the start port pointer, data indicating “first” or “second” may be set in a register inside the game control microcomputer 560.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the start port pointer is 4 (step S2114A). If the value of the reserved storage number counter is 4, the process proceeds to step S2139. If the value of the reserved memory number counter is not 4, the CPU 56 increments the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start port pointer by 1 (step S2114B). Specifically, when the starting port pointer indicates “first”, the value of the first reserved memory number counter indicating the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, and the starting port pointer indicates “second”. If it is, the value of the second reserved memory number counter indicating the second reserved memory number is incremented by one. Then, the CPU 56 increases the value of the total pending memory number counter indicating the total pending memory number which is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by 1 (step S2115).

  In addition, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning prize port 1013 and the second start winning prize port 1014. Data indicated by the start port pointer is set in the area (step S2116). Specifically, when the start port pointer indicates “first”, data indicating “first” is set, and when the start port pointer indicates “second”, “second” is set. Set the data indicating. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved memory (when neither data indicating “first” nor data indicating “second” is set), the reserved memory specifying information storage area (holding specified area) is stored. Is set to 00 (H). In the reserved storage specifying information storage area (hold specified area), data corresponding to the data (address data) indicated by the start port pointer may be set in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter. . For example, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data corresponding to the data indicating “first” when the start port pointer indicates “first”. When the start port pointer indicates “second”, 02 (H) is set as data corresponding to the data indicating “second”.

  FIG. 94A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 94 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the combined reserved storage number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 94 (A) shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 94 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the 2 start winning opening 1014. Therefore, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 1013 and the second starting winning opening 1014 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  When the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed in preference to the variable display of the first special symbol, if there is at least one second reserved memory, regardless of the presence or absence of the first reserved memory Since the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed, and control is performed so that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed only when there is only the first reserved memory without the second reserved memory, the first start As long as the winning order of the winning opening 1013 and the winning order of the second starting winning opening 1014 can be specified, it is not always necessary to specify the winning order to the first starting winning opening 1013 and the second starting winning opening 1014. For this reason, when the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed with priority, the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area) may not be provided.

  FIG. 94B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 94B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  The CPU 56 extracts a software random number (a counter value for generating a big hit type determination random number, etc.) and a random R (a big hit determination random number), and uses them as an extracted random number value as the first reserved storage buffer. And the process of storing in the storage area in the holding storage buffer indicated by the start port pointer of the second holding storage buffer (step S2117). Specifically, when the start port pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the software random number and random R in the storage area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved memory number counter of the first reserved memory buffer. When the start port pointer indicates “second”, the software random number and random R are stored in the storage area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved memory number counter of the second reserved memory buffer.

  In the first reserved memory number buffer, each storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number is a continuous address area. In the second reserved memory number buffer, each save area corresponds to the second reserved memory number. The storage area is a continuous address area. In this case, the CPU 56 recognizes the head address of the reserved memory number buffer (the first reserved memory number buffer or the second reserved memory number buffer) based on the data indicated by the start port pointer. Then, the software random number and the random R are stored in the storage area using a value obtained by multiplying the number of data per one hold memory (the number of each random number) by the hold memory number (value indicated by the hold memory number counter) as an offset value.

  In step S2117, the CPU 56 extracts the values of MR1 to MR4 as software random numbers, and reads the count value of the random number circuit 503 to extract the random R. In addition, each of the first to eighth areas in the reserved specific area illustrated in FIG. 94 (A) further includes two storage areas for storing the extracted random number values (a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory and A storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage) may be formed. In the case of such a configuration, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter in the process of step S2117, and the area (first through first) in the pending specific area corresponding to the count value (total pending storage number). In any of the eighth areas), the random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the start winning opening identified as having been won (corresponding to the data of the start opening pointer). Alternatively, without providing a total pending storage number counter, each time the processing of step S2117 is executed, the value of the first pending storage number counter and the value of the second pending storage number counter are added, and the pending specification corresponding to the total value is added. In the area (any one of the first to eighth areas) in the area, the random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the start winning opening identified as having won. In the configuration in which the total pending storage number counter is provided, it is not necessary to perform processing (arithmetic processing) for adding the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the number of processes can be reduced. In the configuration in which the memory number counter is not provided, the capacity of the RAM 55 can be reduced.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the start winning designation command indicated by the start port pointer (step S2118). Specifically, when the starting port pointer indicates “first”, a first starting winning designation command is transmitted, and when the starting port pointer indicates “second”, the second starting winning specification is specified. Send a command. Also, a total pending storage number designation command is transmitted (step S2119). Note that the total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted before the first start prize designation command or the second start prize designation command.

  When transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of a command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command as a pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S29). Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is set in the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command.

  Note that the CPU 56 may execute the process of setting the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command in the pointer before or after the process of step S2112 or before or after the process of step S2113.

  In step S2119, the total reserved memory number designation command is configured to be transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the reserved memory number indicated by the start port pointer is indicated. A pending storage number designation command may be transmitted. Further, only the start winning designation command may be transmitted in step S2118, and the total pending storage number designation command may not be transmitted in step S2119.

  If the start port pointer indicates “second” (step S2121), it is checked whether bit 7 of the loaded data is 1 (step S2122). If bit 7 of the loaded data is 1, data indicating “first” is set in the start pointer (step S2123), and the process proceeds to step S2114A. When bits 6 and 7 of the loaded data are both 1 by the processing of steps S2121 to S2123, that is, when both the first start port switch 1013a and the second start port switch 1014a are turned on. After the processing of steps S2114A to S2119 is executed for the second start port switch 1014a corresponding to bit 7, the processing of steps S2114A to S2119 is immediately executed for the first start port switch 1013a corresponding to bit 6. It will be.

  In this embodiment, when both the first start port switch 1013a and the second start port switch 1014a are turned on, both switches are turned on by the process executed within 2 ms. A process based on this is executed. Therefore, for example, even if a situation occurs in which the period during which the switch that has detected the game ball has the detection signal turned on is extremely short, the processing based on the switch being turned on can be completed with certainty. In addition, since the processing of steps S2114A to S2119 based on both switches being turned on is completed within 2 ms (within 1 timer interrupt processing), random numbers are extracted before the software random number increases by one. Is done. Therefore, an accurate software random number value corresponding to the winning timing can be extracted.

  If the start port pointer does not indicate “second”, or if the start port pointer indicates “second” but bit 7 of the loaded data is not 1, the process proceeds to step S2131.

  In step S 2131, it is confirmed whether both bit 6 and bit 7 of the loaded data are 1. If bit 6 and bit 7 of the loaded data are both 1, the start port pointer is cleared (step S2139), and the process ends. That is, if both the first start port switch 1013a and the second start port switch 1014a are in the on state, the processing after step S2132 is not executed. That is, both the first start port switch 1013a and the second start port switch 1014a are in the on state in the specifying process (the process for specifying which start winning port 1013, 1014 has been won). Since a situation in which an erroneous determination is made does not occur, the confirmation process (steps S2132 to S2138) for confirming whether or not the result of the specific process and the state of the detection signal input to the input port match is performed. Then, the start port pointer is cleared and the process is terminated.

  When both the bit 6 and the bit 7 of the loaded data are not 1 (when only one of the bits 6 and 7 is 1), the CPU 56 indicates that the start pointer indicates “second”. It is confirmed whether or not (step S2132). When the start port pointer indicates “second”, it is confirmed whether or not the bit 6 of the input port 0 to which the detection signal of the second start port switch 1014a is input is 1 (step S2133). In the processing of steps S2111 and S2112, when the bit 6 of the input port 0 is 1, “second” is set to the start port pointer. Therefore, when the start pointer indicates “second”, bit 6 of input port 0 should be 1. If bit 6 of input port 0 is 1, it is determined that input port input detection is normal, and the process proceeds to step S2139.

  If bit 6 of input port 0 is not 1, it is inconsistent with the determination result in step S2111. Therefore, in order to execute the determination process in step S2111 again, the start port pointer is cleared (step S2137). ) After reading the data of the input port 0 (the port for inputting signals such as the start port switches 1013a and 1014a) and loading the data into, for example, a predetermined area of the register or RAM 55 (step S2138), the process proceeds to step S2111. Note that the value of the second reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 in step S2114B, and the value of the total pending memory number counter is incremented by 1 in step S2119. That is, the value of the second reserved memory number counter and the value of the total reserved memory number counter are set to -1 (step S2134).

  When the start port pointer does not indicate “second”, that is, when it indicates “first”, the bit 7 of the input port 0 to which the detection signal of the first start port switch 1013a is input is 1. It is confirmed whether or not (step S2135). In the processing of steps S2111 and S2113, when bit 7 of input port 0 is 1, “first” is set in the start port pointer. Therefore, when the start pointer indicates “first”, bit 7 of input port 0 should be 1. If bit 7 of input port 0 is 1, it is determined that input port input detection is normal, and the process proceeds to step S2139.

  If bit 7 of input port 0 is not 1, it is inconsistent with the determination result in step S2111. Therefore, in order to re-execute the determination process in step S2111, the processes in steps S2137 and S2138 are executed again. The process proceeds to step S2111. Note that the value of the first reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1 in step S2114B, and the value of the total pending memory number counter is incremented by 1 in step S2119. That is, the value of the first reserved memory number counter and the value of the combined reserved memory number counter are set to −1 (step S2136).

  In this embodiment, after the game control microcomputer 560 executes a specifying process (a process for specifying which start opening has been won) based on the detection signal input to the input port 0, When the result of the specific process and the state of the detection signal input to the input port do not match, the specific process is executed again, so whether the winning to the first start port 1013 has occurred or not to the second start port 1014 It is determined reliably whether or not a prize has occurred. For example, if a winning to the first starting port 1013 occurs when the first reserved memory number is the upper limit of 4, the winning is not regarded as a valid starting winning, but the first starting When it is determined that the winning to the mouth 1013 is erroneously the winning to the second starting port 1014, the value of the second reserved memory number is increased (when the second reserved memory number is not 4 which is the upper limit value). ). In other words, although it should not be a valid start prize, it will be a valid start prize. In this embodiment, the possibility of such a situation is reduced.

  However, it may not be configured to execute the specific process again. In such a configuration, the processes in steps S2131 to S2138 may not be executed. In this case, the program capacity is reduced as compared with the case where the specific process is executed again. In the case where the specific process is not executed again, the program is configured to shift to step S2139 instead of the process to shift to step S2131 in FIG.

  Further, in order to prevent a situation in which the specific process is repeatedly executed indefinitely, after the specific process is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the process of steps S2131 to S2138 is not executed, and the reserved storage specifying information The data stored in the storage area and the random number value stored in the reserved storage number buffer may be cleared, and the start port switch passing process may be terminated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specific process is repeatedly executed indefinitely due to the influence of noise or the like and the gaming machine does not operate.

  Further, the specific process may not be performed again after the processes of steps S2131 to S2138 are performed. In this case, when the process of step S2138 is executed, the start port switch passing process is terminated. Note that the content of the storage area corresponding to the value of the pending storage number counter before being subtracted in the processes of steps S2134 and S2136 is a random value newly extracted when the processes of steps S2114B and S2116 are subsequently executed. However, when the process of step S2138 is executed and the starter switch passing process is terminated (the same applies to the case where the process of step S2138 is executed and the process proceeds to step S2111 as in this embodiment). As a precaution, the contents of the storage area corresponding to the value of the reserved storage number counter before being subtracted in the processing of steps S2134 and S2136 may be cleared.

  In addition, when the process after step S2111 is performed again, if the process of step S2118 and S2119 is performed again, a start winning designation | designated designation | designated command and a total pending | holding storage number designation | designated command will be transmitted twice. In order to avoid such a situation, when it is determined with certainty whether a winning at the first starting port 1013 has occurred or a winning at the second starting port 1014 has occurred, a start winning designation command and What is necessary is just to comprise so that a total pending storage number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, the subroutine of step S1313 is executed after the processes of steps S1311, S1312, but the subroutine of step S1313 is not executed, and the processes of steps S1311, S312 are continued. The process in steps S211 to S2139 may be executed when it is determined that N (that is, there is a start prize) in step S1312.

  In the start port switch passing process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 1013 or the process for the second start winning opening 1014 is executed. Data indicating “second” is set in the start port pointer. In the subsequent processing, processing corresponding to the data set in the start port pointer is executed. For example, taking the process of step S2114B as an example, specifically, the first reserved memory number counter and the second reserved memory number counter are formed at consecutive addresses in the RAM 55, and the first of the processes in step S2114B is performed first. The address of the reserved memory number counter is set in the register, and the value set in the start port pointer in the register (for example, data indicating “first” is “0” and data indicating “second” is “1”). ”) Is added, the value of the register after the addition is used as the address of the RAM 55, and 1 is added to the data at that address. According to such processing, the target of the addition processing is the first reserved memory number counter when the data indicating “first” is set in the start port pointer, and indicates “second” in the start port pointer. When data is set, it is a second reserved memory number counter. That is, in one addition process, the value of the reserved memory number counter corresponding to the start winning opening that is turned on is automatically incremented by one. In other words, the processing for both start winning awards is made common.

  Here, the process of step S2114B is taken as an example, but the process can also be made common to the processes of step S2116 and step S2118. For example, data corresponding to the first start winning prize (address of the first reserved storage number buffer or command transmission table address of the first start winning designation command) is set in the register, and the start pointer is set in the register. By adding the value as an offset and setting the data based on the value of the register after the addition (in the case of step S2116) and specifying the address of the command transmission table (in the case of step S2118), one process is performed. , Data setting processing and command transmission table address designation can be performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the first reserved memory number buffer and the second reserved memory number buffer are separately provided is described as an example, but the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are common. A reserved storage number buffer may be provided. FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a common reserved memory number buffer provided in common for the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. As shown in FIG. 95, the common reserved storage number buffer includes eight areas obtained by combining the reserved storage specifying information storage area and the random value storage area. In the common reserved storage number buffer, consecutive addresses are assigned to the reserved storage specific information storage area and the random value storage area.

  When using the common reserved memory number buffer, the CPU 56 increments the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the start-up pointer in step S2114B, increments the value of the total reserved memory number counter by 1 in step S2115, and then proceeds to step S2116. Instead of the above process, a process of setting the data indicated by the start port pointer in the reserved storage specifying information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer is executed. Specifically, the CPU 56 determines the position of the pointer that specifies the address of the data storage destination based on the total number of reserved memories (which may be obtained by adding the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number each time). By updating, data is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area at the head of the empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer.

  When specifying the head of the free area of the common reserved memory number buffer, for example, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of reserved memories by the number of data stored in the common reserved memory number buffer per one reserved memory (that is, the A value obtained by adding one storage specific information storage area) is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 95, two data storage areas, a reserved storage specific information storage area and a random value storage area, are provided for each reserved storage in the common reserved storage number buffer. Therefore, a value obtained by adding 1 (that is, one reserved storage specific information storage area) to the value obtained by doubling the total number of reserved storage is obtained as an address offset value, and the pointer is updated according to the obtained offset value. For example, when the total number of pending storages is 3, as shown in FIG. 95, the reserved storage specific information storage area corresponding to the offset value +7 (a value obtained by doubling the total pending storage number 3 and adding 1). Set the data to. In this case, when the start port pointer indicates “first”, data indicating “first” is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area, and when the start port pointer indicates “second”. Sets data indicating “second” in the reserved storage specific information storage area. In addition, for example, in the common pending storage number buffer, a total of three of the reserved storage specific information saving area per reserved memory and two random value saving areas (for example, for the big hit type determination random number and for the big hit determination random number) When a data storage area is provided, a value obtained by adding 1 (that is, one area of the reserved storage specific information storage area) to the value obtained by multiplying the total number of the reserved storage by 3 is obtained as an address offset value. The pointer may be updated according to the offset value.

  When the initial position of the pointer for designating the data storage destination address is set as the first area of the common reserved memory number buffer (the reserved storage specific information storage area for the reserved storage 1 shown in FIG. 95), the CPU 56 May be obtained as an offset value of an address by multiplying the total number of pending storages by the number of data stored in the common pending storage number buffer per one pending storage. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 95, a value obtained by doubling the total number of pending storages may be obtained as an address offset value. Then, the CPU 56 may control to update the pointer by setting the position of the pointer to a position moved by an offset value from the initial position. In addition, for example, in the common pending storage number buffer, a total of three of the reserved storage specific information saving area per reserved memory and two random value saving areas (for example, for the big hit type determination random number and for the big hit determination random number) If a data storage area is provided, a value obtained by multiplying the total number of pending storages by three may be obtained as an address offset value.

  In addition, instead of the process of step S2117, the CPU 56 extracts software random numbers (counter values for generating big hit determination random numbers, etc.) and random R (big hit determination random numbers), and extracts them. A process of storing as a random value in a random value storage area at the head of an empty area of the common reserved storage number buffer is executed. Specifically, after setting the data in the reserved storage specific information storage area, the CPU 56 updates the position of the pointer that designates the address by one, and stores the random value in the random value storage area at the address pointed to by the updated pointer. Is stored. Note that the CPU 56 may perform the same processing for the number of types of random number values to be stored.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing (step S1300) in special symbol process processing according to the third embodiment. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S2051). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks the value of the second reserved memory number (step S2052). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is confirmed. If the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “first” (step S2053). If the second reserved storage number is not 0, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (step S2054). By the processing of steps S2052 to S2054, on the condition that the second reserved memory number is not 0, control is performed so that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol.

  When data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer in step S2053, the first symbol variation designation command is issued based on the fact that data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer. Transmitted (step S101), the first special symbol variation is started (step S103), and the first special symbol variation is stopped (step S130). In addition, when data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer in step S2054, the second symbol variation designation is made based on the fact that data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer. A command is transmitted (step S101), the variation of the second special symbol is started (step S103), and the variation of the second special symbol is stopped (step S130). According to such a configuration, the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol can be controlled by the common special symbol process, which can simplify the process and reduce the program capacity. be able to. In addition, commands other than the symbol variation designation command can be used in common for the variation of the first special symbol and the variation of the second special symbol, and the production control microcomputer 100 is a production component and specified by the symbol variation designation command. When the effect corresponding to the variable display means to be performed (the effect corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 are not increased. can do.

  In addition, only when the gaming state is the short-time state or the probability-changing state (only when the state is the short-time state, only when the probability-changing state, or only when the state is the short-time state or the certainty-changing state), Control may be performed so that the change display is prioritized. That is, the game state is confirmed, and when the game state is the normal state, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in the order in which the start winnings are generated (the processing of steps S2052 to S2054 described above is performed). However, when the gaming state is the short-time state or the probability variation state, control is performed so that the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, since the variable winning ball apparatus 1015 is released at a high frequency in the short-time state or the probability changing state, and there is a high possibility that many game balls will win the second starting winning hole 1014, the second starting winning hole 1014 The probability of occurrence of invalid start prizes (occurrence of second start prizes that occur after the second reserved memory number reaches 4) is high, but the second special symbol change display is displayed in the short-time state or the probable change state. By executing with priority, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of invalid start winnings in the second starting winning award opening 1014.

  In this embodiment, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is always executed with priority given that the second reserved memory number is not 0 will be described. However, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are described. It may be determined which of the stored number is larger than the stored number, and the special symbol corresponding to the one with the larger stored number is preferentially executed. For example, in step S2052, it is confirmed whether the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number. If the first reserved memory number is larger than the second reserved memory number, the process proceeds to step S2053 and the first special symbol. If the first reserved memory number is not larger than the second reserved memory number, the process proceeds to step S2054 and the second special symbol variable display is preferentially executed. Also good. In this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are the same number, the variable display of the first special symbol may be preferentially executed, or the second special symbol may be executed. The change display may be executed with priority. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferentially execute the variable symbol display corresponding to the larger one of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. In addition, since it is possible to preferentially start the fluctuation based on the winning at the start winning opening having the larger number of stored memories, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the invalid starting winning at the starting winning opening.

  In the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S2055). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S2056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1, and m (m = 2 to 8) th of the reserved memory specifying information storage area (holding specified area). Are stored in the (m−1) th area. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1, and is also stored in the m (m = 2 to 8) th area of the reserved memory specifying information storage area (holding specified area). Are stored in the (m−1) th area.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  If a common reserved memory number buffer as shown in FIG. 95 is used, in step S2052, the CPU 56 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 by checking the count value of the second reserved memory number counter. Or the second reserved memory number is 0 by checking whether or not data indicating “second” is set in each reserved memory specific information storage area of the common reserved memory number buffer. It may be confirmed whether or not. If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (see step S2053). If the second reserved memory number is not 0, data indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer (see step S2054).

  Next, for example, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in step S 2055, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved storage specific information storing data indicating “first” in the common reserved storage number buffer. An area may be specified, and each random value stored in the random value storage area corresponding to the next address of the specified reserved storage specifying information storage area may be read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM. Further, for example, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, in step S2055, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved storage specifying information in which data indicating “second” in the common reserved memory number buffer is stored. An area may be specified, and each random value stored in the random value storage area corresponding to the next address of the specified reserved storage specifying information storage area may be read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM. In step S2056, the contents of the reserved storage specific information storage area and the random value storage area after the random storage value storage area corresponding to the specified reserved storage specific information storage area and the next address may be shifted.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 1013, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 1014 Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing in steps S1300 to S1310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Thereafter, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S2057). After that, the CPU 56 confirms the current gaming state based on the setting state of a flag (probability change flag, time reduction flag) indicating the gaming state, and executes control to transmit a background designation command corresponding to the current gaming state (step) S2058). Specifically, when the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set, a probability change state background designation command is transmitted, and when the time reduction state is set, a time reduction state background designation command is transmitted. When not set, a normal state background designation command is transmitted.

  After that, the big hit determination process is executed, and if it is decided to win, the big hit type determination process is executed and the flag setting process according to the big hit type and the big hit symbol determination process according to the big hit type are executed. When it is determined to be executed and to be disengaged, a dismissal symbol determining process is executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (a process similar to the process in steps S61 to 63, S71, and S74 in FIG. 30 is executed).

  In the third embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol when the variation of the first special symbol is started after the variation pattern is determined. When an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 101 and variation of the second special symbol is started, an effect indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started Control for transmitting a control command (second symbol variation designation command) to the CPU 101 for effect control is executed. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). Then, after transmitting the symbol variation designation command, the CPU 56 executes control for transmitting an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating the variation pattern to the effect control CPU 101. Then, the CPU 56 starts the variation of the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer, sets the variation time specified by the variation pattern in the variation time timer, and then sets the value of the special symbol process flag to the display result identification command transmission process. Update to the corresponding value.

  In the third embodiment, in the display result specifying command transmission process, the CPU 56 executes control for transmitting a display result specifying command corresponding to the result of the big hit determination / big hit type determination. For example, when a loss is determined, a display result specifying command indicating a loss is transmitted, and when a non-probability variable big hit is determined, a display result specifying command indicating a non-probable big hit (usually a big hit) is transmitted. When the probability variation jackpot is determined, control for transmitting a display result specifying command indicating the probability variation jackpot is executed. And CPU56 performs control which transmits the production | presentation control command (total pending storage number subtraction designation | designated command) which designates subtracting 1 the total pending storage number. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process.

  Further, in this third embodiment, when shifting to the big hit gaming state, when the probable big hit is made, the first big winning opening (first special variable winning ball apparatus 1020a) is opened 15 times, and when the normal big hit is achieved Controls to open the second big prize opening (second special variable winning ball apparatus 1020b) seven times. That is, the probable big hit is a big hit in which the first big winning opening is executed for 15 rounds, and the normal big hit is a big hit in which the second big winning opening is executed for seven rounds. In addition, the opening time per round may be different between the case of the probable big hit and the case of the normal big hit (for example, 29 seconds for the probable big hit and 20 seconds for the normal big hit). In this case, when shifting to a promising big hit (15 round big hit) game, a threshold value corresponding to the number of times the first big winning opening is opened and the opening time (the maximum number of winnings that allow winning to the first big winning opening) ), And when shifting to a regular big hit (7 round big hit) game, the threshold value according to the number of open times and open times of the second big prize opening (maximum that allows winning to the second big prize opening) Number of winnings). Even when the same probability variation big hit occurs, the opening time per round may be different, and when the same normal big hit occurs, the opening time per round may be different. Even in the case of the same probability variation big hit, a big hit of 7 rounds and a big hit of 15 rounds may be provided, and even in the same normal big hit, a big hit of 7 rounds and a big hit of 15 rounds may be provided.

  In the third embodiment, in the main process (see FIG. 68) executed by the effect control CPU 101, a hold memory display control process for displaying the total number of hold memories on the screen of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  In the third embodiment, if the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command in the command analysis process (step S704), the effect control CPU 101 sets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag. To do. If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set.

  If the received effect control command is a combined pending storage number designation command, the effect control CPU 101 stores the second byte data (EXT data) of the combined pending storage number designation command in the combined pending storage number storage area. If the CPU 101 for effect control receives the same total pending storage number designation command twice without receiving the total pending storage count subtraction designation command, it discards the first total pending storage count designation command received. (For example, the total pending storage number storage area is once cleared, and the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command received second time may be stored in the total pending storage number storage area.

  If the received effect control command is the first start winning designation command, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first start winning flag. If the received effect control command is the second start winning designation command, the effect control CPU 101 sets the second start winning flag. If the received effect control command is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag.

  FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display state of the summation pending storage display area. As shown in FIGS. 97 (A) and 97 (B), the number of circles (up to 8) corresponding to the total number of pending storages is displayed in the total pending storage display area on the display screen on the effect display device 1009. The The effect control microcomputer 100 causes the VDP 109 to display a circle so that the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory can be distinguished. For example, a circle corresponding to the first reserved memory is displayed in red, and a circle corresponding to the second reserved memory is displayed in green. Note that the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory may be displayed in the same manner (for example, in the same shape and the same color).

  FIG. 97 (C) shows an example of the display state of the total pending storage display area at the time of power failure recovery. As shown in FIG. 97 (C), at the time of power failure recovery, a number of stars corresponding to the total number of pending storage is displayed in the total pending storage display area. FIG. 97 (D) shows an example of the display state of the total pending storage display area when the total pending storage number designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 560 but the start winning designation command cannot be received. Yes. As shown in FIG. 97 (D), when the start winning designation command cannot be received, a blue circle is displayed in the total pending storage display area.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (C), at the time of power failure recovery, the production control microcomputer 100 displays a display corresponding to the original first reserved memory (first start winning memory) (in this example, a red circle is displayed). ) And the display corresponding to the second reserved memory (second start-up winning memory) (in this example, the display of the green circle) is a display of the number specified by the total reserved memory number designation command (this In the example, an asterisk) is displayed in the total pending storage display area. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that the gaming state has been restored by using the display in the total pending storage display area. In addition, if the display mode of the total reserved storage display area at the time of power failure recovery is different from the display mode corresponding to the original first reserved memory and the display mode corresponding to the second reserved memory, Thus, it is not limited to changing the shape of the displayed image. For example, the color may be changed without changing the shape, or the size may be changed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 97D, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the display corresponding to the original first reserved memory (in this example, a red circle). The image corresponding to the increased reserved memory is displayed in a different manner from the display corresponding to the second reserved memory (in this example, the display of the green circle). Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp that an abnormality has occurred regarding transmission / reception of the effect control command (in this example, the start winning designation command).

  It should be noted that the display mode of the combined reserved storage display area when the start winning designation command cannot be received is different from the display mode corresponding to the original first reserved memory and the display mode corresponding to the second reserved memory. For example, it is not limited to changing the color of the displayed image as in this embodiment. For example, the shape (for example, a star) may be changed without changing the color, or the size may be changed.

  Further, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, a predetermined one of the red or green circles may be displayed. For example, when a start winning designation command cannot be received, a red circle may always be displayed in the total pending storage display area, or a green circle may always be displayed.

  Further, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, it may be determined randomly whether to display a red or green circle. For example, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, it may be determined whether to display a red or green circle by a lottery process using a random number, and displayed in the total pending storage display area. .

  Further, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, it may be determined whether to display a red or green circle based on the number of reserved storage. For example, if the start winning designation command cannot be received and the first reserved memory number is the upper limit (4), the second starting prize designation command is to be received, so a green circle is displayed. You may make it display on a total pending storage display area. Conversely, for example, when the second reserved memory number is the upper limit value (4), the first start winning designation command should be received, so that a red circle is displayed in the total reserved memory display area. It may be. Further, even if the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value, it is determined which of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is larger, and the smaller reserved memory is supported. A color circle may be displayed. For example, if the first reserved memory number (for example, 2) is less than the second reserved memory number (for example, 3), a red circle may be displayed in the combined reserved memory display area. Conversely, it may be determined which of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is larger, and a circle of a color corresponding to the larger reserved memory may be displayed.

  Further, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, it may be determined whether to display a red or green circle based on the total number of pending storage. For example, when the total number of reserved storage is large, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in an open state, and it is easy to win the second start winning port 1014 (totally the first start winning port 1013 and the second start winning port 1014 in total). It is often easy to win a prize. In this case, it is determined whether or not the total pending storage number is a predetermined value (for example, 4) or more, and if it is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a green circle is displayed in the total pending storage display area. If there is, a red circle may be displayed in the combined storage storage display area.

  Further, when the start winning designation command cannot be received, it may be determined whether to display a red or green circle based on the gaming state. For example, the fact that the gaming state is in the high base state means that the frequency of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 being in the open state is increased and it is easy to win the second start winning opening 1014 (the first start winning prize in total) In many cases, it is easy to win the mouth 1013 and the second start winning opening 1014. In this case, it is determined whether the gaming state is a high base state or a low base state. If the gaming state is a high base state, a green circle is displayed in the total pending storage display area. A red circle may be displayed in the combined suspension storage display area.

  98 to 100 are flowcharts showing the hold storage display control process executed in the effect control main process in the third embodiment. In the hold memory display control process, the production control CPU 101 stores the data in the sum hold memory number storage area in which the second byte data (EXT data) of the sum hold memory number designation command is stored in the sum hold memory number counter. It is confirmed whether or not the value is larger than the value (step S1901). If the data in the total pending storage number storage area is not larger than the value of the total pending storage number counter, the process proceeds to step S1941.

  The fact that the data in the total pending storage count storage area is larger than the value of the total pending storage count counter means that a new total pending storage count designation command has been received. When the power is turned on (including when the power supply is resumed after being stopped), the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 by the initialization process in step S701. Accordingly, when the data in the total pending storage number storage area is updated based on the reception of the total pending storage number designation command transmitted at the time of power supply recovery in step S43 (updated by the command analysis process), the summation is performed in step S1901. It is determined that the data in the reserved memory number storage area is larger than the value of the total reserved memory number counter.

  When the data in the total reserved memory number storage area is larger than the value of the total reserved memory number counter, whether or not the production control CPU 101 has a power failure recovery flag indicating that a power failure recovery designation command has been received is set. Confirmation is made (step S1902). If the power failure recovery flag is set, the power failure recovery flag is reset (step S1903), and the number of stars corresponding to the data (value) in the total pending storage number storage area is displayed in the total pending storage display area (Step S1904). That is, the number of star images stored in the total reserved storage number storage area is displayed (see FIG. 97C).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sets the data of the total pending storage number storage area in the unknown start winning storage number counter (step S1905). The unknown start winning memory number counter is a counter formed in the RAM, and is a counter for counting the number of reserved memories that are unknown whether the reserved memory corresponding to the first starting prize or the reserved memory corresponding to the second starting prize. It is. Hereinafter, the reserved memory in which the reserved memory corresponding to the first start prize or the reserved memory corresponding to the second start prize is unknown is referred to as unknown reserved memory.

  Further, in the total pending storage table, the number of data corresponding to the data (value) in the total pending storage number storage area is changed to data indicating “unknown” (step S1906). The total hold storage table is a table formed in the RAM, and whether each hold storage is a hold storage corresponding to the first start prize, a hold memory corresponding to the second start prize, or whether it is unknown. This is a table in which data indicating is set.

  Then, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is set in the total pending storage number counter (step S1907).

  When the power failure recovery flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first start winning flag indicating that the first start winning designation command has been received is set (step S1909). If the first start winning flag is set, the first starting winning flag is reset (step S1910), the number of circles displayed in the total pending storage display area is increased by 1, and the increased circle is displayed in red. Control is performed as described above (step S1911). Further, the value of the first start winning counter is incremented by 1 (step S1912), and the data corresponding to the data (value) in the total reserved storage number storage area is set to data indicating “first” in the total pending storage table (step S1912). S1913). For example, if the data in the total pending storage number storage area is “5”, the fifth data in the total pending storage table is set to data indicating “first”. That is, the data corresponding to the increased reserved storage is set to data indicating “first”.

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the first start winning counter has reached the upper limit “4” (step S1914). If it is not “4”, the process proceeds to step S907. If it is “4”, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the unknown start winning counter is 0 (step S1915). If the value of the unknown start winning counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S1907. The fact that the value of the unknown start winning counter is not 0 at this stage means that the number of unknown reserved memories indicated by the value of the unknown start winning counter is actually a reserved memory based on the second start winning prize. Because the upper limit number of the first reserved memory number is 4 and the value of the first start winning counter is 4, other reserved memories (the number of reserved memories exceeding 4) are the first start winning prizes. This is because it is not based on the reserved memory. That is, the other reserved memory is a reserved memory based on the second start winning prize.

  Therefore, if the value of the unknown start winning counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 changes the star displayed in the total pending storage display area to a green circle corresponding to the second start winning ( Step S1916). Further, the data indicating “unknown” in the total pending storage table is changed to data indicating “second” (step S1917). Further, the value of the unknown start winning counter is set to 0 (step S1918), and the value of the second starting winning counter is updated (step S1919). In step S1919, the value of the unknown starting winning counter before being set to 0 is added to the value of the second starting winning counter. Then, control goes to a step S1907.

  By performing such control, an abnormality occurs in the transmission / reception of the production control command, an unknown pending storage occurs, and when the display corresponding to the unknown pending storage is displayed in the total pending storage display area, the display is normal. You can return to the display.

  If the first start winning flag is not set, it is checked whether or not the second starting winning flag is set (step S1921). If the second start winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1931. If the second start winning flag is set, the second starting winning flag is reset (step S1922), the number of circles displayed in the total pending storage display area is increased by 1, and the increased circle is displayed in green. The display is controlled (step S1923). Further, the value of the second start winning counter is incremented by 1 (step S1924), and the data corresponding to the data (value) in the total reserved storage number storage area is set to data indicating “second” in the total pending storage table (step S1924). S1925).

  Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second start winning counter has reached the upper limit “4” (step S1926). If it is not “4”, the process proceeds to step S1935. If it is “4”, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the unknown start winning counter is 0 (step S1927). If the value of the unknown start winning counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S1935. When the value of the unknown start winning counter is not 0, the effect control CPU 101 changes the star displayed in the total pending storage display area to a red circle corresponding to the first start winning (step S1928). ). Further, the data indicating “unknown” in the total pending storage table is changed to data indicating “first” (step S1929). Further, the value of the unknown start winning counter is set to 0 (step S1930), and the value of the first starting winning counter is updated (step S1934). In step S1934, the value of the unknown start winning counter before being set to 0 is added to the value of the first starting winning counter. Then, control goes to a step S1935.

  In step S1935, the data in the total pending storage number storage area is set in the total pending storage number counter.

  In step S1931, the number of displays in the total pending storage display area is increased by 1, and the increased display is controlled to be displayed in blue. Further, the value of the unknown start winning counter is incremented by 1 (step S1932), and the data corresponding to the data (value) in the total reserved storage number storage area is set to data indicating “unknown” in the total pending storage table (step S1933). . Then, control goes to a step S1935.

  In step S1941, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is set. If the total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is set, the total pending storage number subtraction designation command reception flag is reset (step S1942), and it is determined whether or not the second pending storage number subtraction flag is set. Confirmation is made (step S1942A). If it is set, the second reserved memory number subtraction flag is reset (step S1942B), and the green circle (the display corresponding to the second reserved memory number) displayed most recently in the combined reserved memory display area is displayed. Erase and control to display each circle or star as a shift on the side of the erased circle or star (step S1942C). Further, the value of the second start winning counter is decremented by 1 (step S1942D). Further, the data corresponding to the oldest second reserved storage number in the total pending storage table is deleted, and the data in the total pending storage table is shifted (step S1942E). Then, control goes to a step S1952.

  If the second reserved memory number subtraction flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 erases the circle mark or star displayed at the earliest in the summed hold memory display area, and erases each circle mark or star mark. Control is performed so as to shift and display the image on the side of the circle or star marked (step S1943). Then, it is checked whether or not the oldest data in the summation pending storage table is data indicating “first” (step S1944). If the data indicates “first”, the value of the first start winning counter is set to − 1 (step S1945), the process proceeds to step S1951. If the oldest data in the summation pending storage table is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “unknown”), the value of the unknown start winning counter is decremented by 1 (step S1948), and step S1951 is performed. Migrate to

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 shifts the data in the summation pending storage table to delete the oldest data in the summation pending storage table (step S1951). Further, the value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by -1 (step S1952), and the value of the total pending storage number counter is set in the total pending storage number storage area (step S1953).

  By the control as described above, the red circle is incremented by 1 when the first start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are received in the total pending storage display area, and the second start winning designation command and the total pending When the storage number designation command is received, control for increasing the green circle by one is realized. Further, when the total pending storage number designation command is received but neither the first start prize designation command nor the second start prize designation command is received, control for increasing the blue circle by one is realized. When the total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received, the circle or star displayed in the total pending storage display area is decremented by one.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory exist, the configuration of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the change of the second special symbol based on the second start winning that is likely to generate the start winning can be executed preferentially, and the reserved memory can be efficiently digested.

  Further, according to the third embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 performs the process from the start of the change of the first special symbol to the stop of the stop symbol based on the winning at the first starting winning opening 1013 and the second starting winning award. The common process routine (steps S1300 to S1304 in the special symbol process) performs the processing from the start of the variation of the second special symbol based on the winning to the mouth 1014 to the stop of the symbol in the common processing routine. , Data stored in different areas when the first special symbol variation is started and when the second special symbol variation is started (for example, the data for the first special symbol and the second special symbol Commands stored in different areas of the ROM 54 as data (for example, symbol variation designation command, start winning designation command), variation pattern When a process based on a table or the like is executed, it is specified which special symbol variation is started (step S2052), and the processing based on the data corresponding to the identified symbol variation is executed according to a common program. . For this reason, it is not necessary to repeatedly program an instruction (for example, a subroutine) for executing the same processing when the first special symbol change is started and when the second special symbol change is started. The program capacity required for control can be compressed to the minimum. .

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 wins the first start winning opening 1013 or the second starting winning opening 1014, a software random number and a random R (random hit determination random number) Is extracted, the software random number and the random R are stored in the first storage area (the first reserved storage number buffer shown in FIG. 94) when the winning to the first starting winning opening 1013 occurs, and the second starting winning opening 1014 is stored. When winning is won, the software random number and random R are stored in the second storage area (second reserved storage number buffer shown in FIG. 94). According to such a configuration, the configuration of the work area (the first reserved memory number buffer and the second reserved memory number buffer) is hardly changed, and the work at the time of creating the program can be simplified. A random number storage buffer for the second special symbol (second reserved memory number buffer) and a winning order storage area (FIG. 94A) are located behind the work area of the program for executing the control for variably displaying one special symbol. This is because it can be realized simply by providing the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) shown in FIG.

  Further, in the third embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 560 wins the first start winning opening 1013 or the second starting winning opening 1014, a software random number and a random R (random hit determination random number) And a software random number and random R together with data indicating which start winning a prize has been generated (data set in the start opening pointer, that is, reserved storage specific information), to which start winning a prize Even when this occurs, the process of storing in the common storage area (common pending storage number buffer shown in FIG. 95) is executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to store a random number by specifying a different storage area depending on which start winning a prize has occurred, and it is possible to further share the processing routine and reduce the program capacity. it can.

  Next, a description will be given of a method for preventing goto due to pulling out (a fraudulent act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine).

  In the normally open vibration sensors 95a to 95f and the magnetic sensor 96a, if the connector (board) to which the vibration sensors 95a to 95f and the magnetic sensor 96a are connected is pulled out, the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a will not operate. In this case, it becomes impossible to prevent an illegal act such as shaking a gaming machine or an illegal act such that a game ball entered in the accessory 20 using a magnet is awarded in the specific area 66. Therefore, the circuit shown in FIG. 101 (FIGS. 101 to 103) shown below is effectively prevented from being pulled out (illegal act).

  FIG. 101 is a circuit diagram showing a first pull-out prevention sensor circuit. As shown in FIG. 101, the “1”, “2”, and “3” terminals of the connector on the sensor board 2000 and the “1”, “2”, and “3” terminals of the connector on the main control board (main board) 31 are connected. The The sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are mounted on the sensor substrate 2000. As shown in FIG. 101, in the sensor board 2000, the “1” terminal and the “2” terminal of the connector are connected to one ends of the sensors 95a to 95f, 96a through signal lines, and the “3” terminal of the connector is connected to the sensor 95a. Are connected to the other ends of .about.95f and 96a by signal lines. Also, as shown in FIG. 101, in the main control board (main board) 31, the “1” terminal of the connector is connected to the voltage (+ V) and the signal line through a resistor. The “2” terminal of the connector is connected to the input port of the CPU 56 (game control microcomputer 560) via a resistor via a signal line, and the point A (branch point) on the path of the signal line is a capacitor. Is grounded. The “3” terminal of the connector is grounded.

  In the above configuration, at the normal time, the signal at point A on the main substrate 31 side is at a high level (H level) (that is, the potential at point A is at a high level). Since the “1” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 is at the high level, the “1” terminal and the “2” terminal of the connector on the sensor board 2000 connected to the “1” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 are at the high level. This is because the “2” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 connected to the “2” terminal of the connector on the sensor board 2000 is also at a high level.

  In this state, when an illegal act is performed and the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are switched on (turned on), the signal at point A on the main board 31 side becomes a low level (L level). When the switches of the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are turned on, the “2” terminal of the connector on the sensor board 200 is connected to the “3” terminal and becomes a low level (current flows to the “3” terminal and the “2” terminal This is because the “2” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 connected to the “2” terminal of the connector on the sensor substrate 2000 is also at the low level. When the signal at point A becomes low level, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal state has occurred (in this case, the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are turned on), and executes the above-described abnormal state notification process.

  When the connector connecting the main board 31 and the sensor board 2000 is removed, the signal at the point A is at a low level (L level). This is because the point A is grounded via a capacitor, and therefore, when the connector connecting the main board 31 and the sensor board 2000 is removed, the potential at the point A becomes the ground potential. When the signal at point A becomes low level, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal state has occurred (in this case, the connector between the sensor board 2000 and the main board 31 has been removed), and performs the abnormal state notification process described above. Execute.

  With the above operation, it is possible to detect the act of pulling out the connector while monitoring the illegal acts of the vibration sensors 95a to 95f and the magnetic sensor 96a, and it is possible to reliably prevent the illegal act at a low cost.

  FIG. 102 is a circuit diagram showing a second pull-out prevention sensor circuit. As shown in FIG. 102, “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” terminals of the connector on the sensor board 2000 and “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” of the connector on the main control board (main board) 31. Terminal is connected. The sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are mounted on the sensor substrate 2000. As shown in FIG. 102, in the sensor board 2000, the “1” terminal and the “2” terminal of the connector are connected by a signal line. Further, the “3” terminal of the connector is connected to one end of the sensors 95a to 95f, 96a via a signal line, and the “4” terminal of the connector is connected to the other end of the sensors 95a to 95f, 96a via a signal line. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 102, in the main control board (main board) 31, the “1” terminal of the connector is connected to the voltage (+ V) and the signal line through a resistor. The “2” terminal of the connector is directly connected to the input port of the CPU 56 (game control microcomputer 560) through a signal line. Further, the “3” terminal of the connector is connected to the voltage (+ V) via a resistor and a signal line, and is also connected to an input port of the CPU 56 (game control microcomputer 560) via a resistor. Furthermore, point B (branch point) on the signal line path is grounded via a capacitor. The “4” terminal of the connector is grounded.

  In the above configuration, at the normal time, the signals at point A (point on the signal line path of the “2” terminal) and point B (point on the signal line path of the “3” terminal) on the main board 31 side are , Both are at a high level (H level) (that is, both the potentials at points A and B are at a high level). Regarding point A, the voltage (+ V) is “2” terminal of the connector of the main board 31 via the “1” terminal of the connector of the main board 31 and the “1” terminal and “2” terminal of the connector of the sensor board 2000. It is because it is connected to. For point B, the voltage (+ V) is connected to the “3” terminal of the connector of the main board 31 via a resistor.

  In this state, when an illegal act is performed and the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are switched on (turned on), the signal at point B on the main board 31 side becomes low level (L level). When the switches of the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are turned on, the “3” terminal of the connector on the sensor board 200 is connected to the “4” terminal and becomes low level (current flows to the “4” terminal and the “3” terminal This is because the “3” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 connected to the “3” terminal of the connector on the sensor substrate 2000 is also at the low level. When the signal at point B becomes low level, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal state has occurred (in this case, the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are turned on), and executes the above-described abnormal state notification process.

  When the connector connecting the main board 31 and the sensor board 2000 is removed, the signal at the point A is at a low level (L level). This is because the voltage (+ V) is not connected. When the signal at point A becomes low level, the CPU 56 determines that an abnormal state has occurred (in this case, the connector between the sensor board 2000 and the main board 31 has been removed), and performs the abnormal state notification process described above. Execute.

  As described above, by monitoring two points A and B, it is possible to detect an illegal act of the vibration sensors 95a to 95f and the magnetic sensor 96a and to detect an action of pulling out the connector. It is possible to reliably prevent fraud. In addition, it is possible to distinguish and judge whether the vibration sensors 95a to 95f and the magnetic sensor 96a are turned on and the connector is pulled out.

  FIG. 103 is a circuit diagram showing a third pull-out prevention sensor circuit. As shown in FIG. 103, the “1” and “2” terminals of the connector on the sensor board 2000 and the “1” and “2” terminals of the connector on the main control board (main board) 31 are connected. The sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are mounted on the sensor substrate 2000. As shown in FIG. 103, in the sensor board 2000, the “1” terminal of the connector is connected to one end of the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a by a signal line, and the “2” terminal of the connector is connected to the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a. It is connected to the other end with a signal line. Further, resistors are connected in parallel with the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a between the “1” terminal and the “2” terminal of the connector. As shown in FIG. 103, in the main control board (main board) 31, the “1” terminal of the connector is connected to the voltage (+ V) and the signal line through a resistor. Further, the “1” terminal of the connector is connected to the input port of the CPU 56 (game control microcomputer 560) via a resistor and an inverting circuit (inverter) with a signal line, and a Zener diode and an inverting circuit in parallel with the resistor. A circuit B consisting of The “1” terminal of the connector is grounded via a capacitor. The “2” terminal of the connector is grounded.

  In the above configuration, at the normal time, the signal at point A on the main substrate 31 side is at a high level (H level) (that is, the potential at point A is at a high level). Voltage (+ V), resistance, “1” terminal of connector on main board 31, “1” terminal of connector on sensor board 2000, resistance, “2” terminal of connector on sensor board 2000, and “ 2 ”terminal is connected. Therefore, the voltage (+ V) is divided by the resistance on the voltage (+ V) side and the resistance on the sensor substrate 2000 side, and the potential (for example, potential h1) of the “1” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 becomes high level. The potential at point A is also at a high level (note that the potential at point A drops slightly due to the resistance between the point A and the “1” terminal of the connector on the main board 31, so that the potential at point A A high level potential (for example, potential h2) that is slightly lower than the potential h1 of the “1” terminal. At this time, the high level signal at the point A is inverted to the low level by the inverting circuit between the point A and the input port of the CPU 56, whereby the low level signal is input to the CPU 56.

  In this state, when an illegal act is performed and the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are switched on (turned on), the signal at point A on the main board 31 side becomes a low level (L level). When the switches of the sensors 95a to 95f and 96a are turned on, the voltage (+ V), the resistance, the “1” terminal of the connector on the main board 31, the “1” terminal of the connector on the sensor board 2000, the sensors 95a to 95f, 96a, The “2” terminal of the connector on the sensor board 2000 and the “2” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 are connected. In this case, since a voltage drop corresponding to the voltage (+ V) occurs only by the resistance on the voltage (+ V) side, the potential of the “1” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 becomes a low level (current flows toward the “2” terminal). The potential at the “1” terminal becomes 0 V and becomes low level), and the potential at the point A also becomes low level. At this time, a low level signal at the point A is inverted to a high level by an inverting circuit between the point A and the input port of the CPU 56, whereby a high level signal is input to the CPU 56.

When the connector connecting the main board 31 and the sensor board 2000 is removed, the signal at the point A is at a low level (L level). Also in this case, since the voltage drop corresponding to the voltage (+ V) occurs only by the resistance on the voltage (+ V) side, the potential of the “1” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 becomes the low level, and the potential at the point A also becomes the low level. It is.
This is because the point A is grounded via a capacitor, and therefore, when the connector connecting the main board 31 and the sensor board 2000 is removed, the potential at the point A becomes the ground potential. At this time, a low level signal at the point A is inverted to a high level by an inverting circuit between the point A and the input port of the CPU 56, whereby a high level signal is input to the CPU 56.

  In addition, when a radio wave is emitted from a radio wave transmitter toward a gaming machine, a fraudulent act called a radio wave goto may be carried out that opens an accessory or malfunctions a winning switch (such as a start switch). is there. In some cases, the radio wave goto is used for a fraudulent table that has been crafted in advance so that a fraudulent program is activated by receiving radio waves of a specific frequency. Here, as shown in FIG. 103, since the circuit B is inserted in parallel with the resistor in the main board 31, even when a radio wave is input from the connector of the main board 31, the circuit B can detect the radio wave. it can. That is, when a radio wave is input from the connector of the main board 31, the radio wave passes through the path on the circuit B side. However, the Zener diode of the circuit B stabilizes the radio wave at a high level constant voltage, and the inverting circuit (inverter) is high. The level voltage is inverted to a low level. Therefore, when a radio wave is input from the connector of the main board 31, the signal at point A is always at a low level, and a high level signal is input to the CPU 56.

  With the above operation, it is possible to detect an illegal act of the vibration sensors 95a to 95f and the magnetic sensor 96a, to detect an act of pulling out the connector, and to reliably prevent the illegal action. In addition, since it is possible to detect radio waves by inserting the circuit B, it is possible to realize an effective radio wave countermeasure.

  When the CPU 56 monitors a signal when the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a are operated or pulled out, when a short sensor operation signal is detected, the sensor is recognized as a magnet / vibration go and the sensor exceeds a certain time. When the operation signal is detected, it can be recognized as a pull-out goto. As a result, it is possible to change the abnormality notification method between the magnet / vibration goto and the pull-out goto.

  In the circuit configuration shown in FIG. 103, for example, the voltage + V is +12 V, the resistance value between the voltage + V and the “1” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 is 2.4 kΩ, and the connector “1” on the sensor board 2000 is used. The resistance value between the terminal and the “2” terminal is 2.4 kΩ, the resistance value between the “1” terminal of the connector on the main board 31 and the inverting circuit (inverter) is 7.5 kΩ, and the capacitance of the capacitor is 0. The Zener voltage value (rated voltage value) of the 1 μF Zener diode is 6.8V.

  Since the detection signals of the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a are configured to be input to the CPU 56, the CPU 56 is illegal based on the input of detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a. When the act is recognized, the game can be stopped, and an illegal act (acquisition of illegal pitching) can be avoided reliably. Even in this configuration, the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command for designating abnormality notification to the effect control CPU 101 based on input of detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a, thereby providing an effect device. It is possible to perform abnormality notification using. Note that the game may not be stopped even when the CPU 56 inputs detection signals from the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a. Further, the detection signals of the magnetic sensors 95a to 95f and the vibration sensor 96a may be input to the effect control CPU 101 without being input to the CPU 56. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably avoid an unauthorized signal from being input from the connector on the main substrate 31 connected to the sensor substrate 2000, and to reduce the possibility of fraudulent acts such as radio wave goto. Can be made.

  FIG. 106 is a front view of another pachinko gaming machine as seen from the front. In the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 3001 shown in FIG. 106, the glass door frame 3002, the hit ball supply tray 3003, the surplus ball receiving tray 3004, the operation knob 3005, the game board 3006, the game area 3007, etc. are shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the glass door frame, the hitting ball supply tray, the surplus ball receiving tray, the operation knob, the game board, the game area, etc., the description is omitted.

  A variable winning ball apparatus 3020 is arranged almost at the center of the game area 3007. Further, on the left side of the variable winning ball apparatus 3020, an ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 3061 that forms a start winning opening is provided. The start winning opening can be made when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 3061 is in an open state (also referred to as an open state). In addition, the start winning opening becomes unable to win when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 3061 is closed (also referred to as a closed state). It should be noted that when the normally variable winning ball device 3061 is in the open state, it may be easier to win than when the normal variable winning ball device 3061 is in the closed state. In addition, when the normal variable winning ball device 3061 is closed, the game ball is not completely unable to win, but compared to when the normal variable winning ball device 3061 is closed. It may be difficult. The winning ball that has entered the start winning opening is detected by the start opening switch 3060 and guided to the back of the game board 3006.

  A special symbol display 3008 as a variable display device that variably displays a special symbol as identification information is provided at the lower right in the variable winning ball apparatus 3020. In this modification, the special symbol display 3008 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the special symbol display 3008 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  For variable display of special symbols, after the start condition, which is the execution condition of variable display, is satisfied (for example, the hitting ball has won the start winning opening), the variable display start condition (for example, variable symbol variable display is executed) The game is started on the basis of the fact that the big hit game is not executed, and when the variable display time has elapsed, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result means stopping and displaying a symbol (an example of identification information).

  Below the special symbol display 3008 is a special symbol composed of four indicators that display the number of effective winning balls that have entered the starting winning opening, that is, the number of reserved memories (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting prize memory). A hold storage indicator 3018 is provided. The special symbol hold memory display 3018 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one each time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display on the special symbol display 3008 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one.

  When the game ball is won at the start winning opening and detected by the start opening switch 3060 and a predetermined number (or symbol) is derived and displayed on the special symbol display 3008, the variable winning ball apparatus 3020 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times. Be controlled. By opening / closing control, the open doors 3076A and 3076B provided above the variable winning ball device 3020 are interlocked and opened, so that the variable winning ball device 3020 is open and the open doors 3076A and 3076B are interlocked. By returning to the closed state, the variable winning ball device 3020 is closed. The state in which the variable winning ball device 3020 performs the opening operation in response to the detection of the winning of the start port switch is referred to as a starting operation state. Hereinafter, the variable winning ball apparatus 3020 may be referred to as an accessory. In addition, the game board 3006 is provided with various bonuses. Hereinafter, when the bonus is referred to, it means the variable winning ball apparatus 3020.

  An effect display device 3009 such as an LCD for effect display is provided on the back side inside the variable winning ball device 3020. The effect display device 3009 variably displays a decorative symbol as identification information (variable display). In this modification, the effect display device 3009 has, for example, three variable display portions (symbol display areas) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”.

  Above the special symbol display 3008, a normal symbol display 3010 that variably displays a normal symbol is provided. When the game ball passes through the gate 3032 provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 3020 and is detected by the gate switch 3032a, the normal symbol display 3010 turns on the normal symbol (in this example, green and red alternately) The variable display of the six LEDs) is started. In this modification, variable display is performed by alternately changing the six LEDs arranged in the vertical direction between a green-lit state and a red-lit state. For example, when the variable display ends, the six LEDs are green. If it stops in the state where it is lit, it will be a hit. In the case of winning, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 3061 is opened for a predetermined time. In the upper left of the normal symbol display 3010 (lower right of the effect display device 3009), a normal symbol start memory display 3041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of balls passed through the gate 3032 is provided. Yes. Each time the gate 3032 passes, the normal symbol start memory display 3041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 3010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  Below the variable winning ball apparatus 3020, there is provided a big winning opening through which the opening / closing plate 3016 is opened by the solenoid 3021 in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state). The opening / closing plate 3016 is means for opening and closing the special winning opening. The winning ball that has entered the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 3023.

  In addition, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 3033 is provided below the gate 3032, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening) 3038 is provided at the upper left of the big winning opening, and a winning is provided at the upper left of the winning opening 3038. A mouth (ordinary winning mouth) 3039 is provided. The game balls won in the game ball winning ports 3033, 3038, 3039 are detected by the winning port switches 3033a, 3038a, 3039a. The winning ports 3033, 3038, and 3039 constitute a winning area provided in the game board 3006 as an area that accepts game media and allows winning. The start winning opening also constitutes a winning area that accepts game media and allows winning, and a winning area is also provided inside the large winning opening. When a game ball wins a winning area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player as a prize (prize ball).

  Further, on the game area 3007, the big winning opening and the winning opening 3033 that are opened and closed by the gate 3032 and the opening / closing plate 3016 are formed as an integrated member 3034. The winning opening 3033 is located directly below the gate 3032, and only the game balls that have passed through the gate 3032 can win the winning opening 3033. Specifically, on the game area 3007, arc-shaped members 3030 projecting arcuately on the left and right sides of the gate 3032 are provided on the left and right sides of the gate 3032. It is in a state covered with the member 3030. Therefore, in this modification, it is possible to win the winning opening 3033 only when the game ball passes through the gate 3032, and the gaming ball wins the winning opening 3033 from the other direction by being blocked by the arcuate member 3030. Never do. In order to make it possible for only the game balls that have passed through the gate 3032 to enter the winning opening 3033, for example, instead of the arcuate member 3030, the upper part of the winning opening 3033 is covered (the gaming ball can pass through). A plurality of nails may be arranged so that there is no gap.

  A projecting portion 3033b projecting to the front side is provided at the lower part of the winning opening 3033 (in this modification, the projecting portion 3033b projects in a triangular shape on the front side when the gaming machine is viewed from the upper surface side). Yes. The game ball that has passed through the gate 3032 first hits the projecting portion 3033b, and when it successfully jumps to the rear side, it wins a winning opening 3033. In addition, although it has passed through the gate 3032, when it hits the protruding portion 3033b and jumps leftward or rightward, it may not win well in the winning opening 3033. Further, a nail hole 3032b in which a nail can be placed is provided between the gate 3032 and the winning opening 3033, and the nail is placed in the nail hole 3032b or the angle of the placed nail is adjusted. By doing so, it is possible to change the probability that a game ball that wants to pass through the gate 3032 wins the winning opening 3033.

  A decorative lamp blinking during the game is provided around the left and right sides of the game area 3007, and an outlet 3026 for collecting the game balls that have not won a prize is provided at the bottom.

  Further, two speakers 3027 that emit sound effects are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 3007. A top frame lamp 3028a, a left frame lamp 3028b, and a right frame lamp 3028c are provided on the outer periphery of the game area 3007. Further, a decoration LED is installed around each structure (variable winning ball device 3020 and the like) in the game area 3007. The top frame lamp 3028a, the left frame lamp 3028b, the right frame lamp 3028c, and the decorative LED are examples of a decorative light emitter provided in the gaming machine.

  A game ball fired from the ball striking device enters the game area 3007 through the ball striking rail, and then falls in the game area 3007. When the hit ball passes through the gate 3032 and is detected by the gate switch 3032a, the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 3010 starts variable display. If it is not in a state in which the variable display of the symbol can be started, if the number of start winning memories which is the reserved storage of the normal symbol variable display on the normal symbol display 3010 is not the upper limit, the number of starting winning memories is increased by one. That is, the number of LEDs to be lit in the normal symbol start memory display 3041 is increased by one. When the stop symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 3010 is a predetermined display result (a winning symbol), the normal variable winning ball device 3061 is opened for a predetermined number of times and the hit ball starts. You can enter the winning entrance. When the hit ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the start winning opening and is detected by the start port switch 3060, the special symbol display unit 3008 displays the variable symbol in a variable state as long as variable symbol display can be started. start. If it is not in a state in which the variable display of symbols can be started, if the number of start winning memories which is the reserved storage of the special symbol variable display on the special symbol display 3008 is not the upper limit, the number of starting winning memories is increased by one. That is, the number of LEDs to be turned on in the special symbol start memory display 3018a is increased by one.

  The variable display of the special symbols (“0” to “9”) on the special symbol display 3008 stops when a predetermined time has elapsed. If the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a big hit symbol (specific display result: specifically, “7”, for example), the first big hit gaming state in the big hit gaming state (big hit that starts without going through the starting operation state) Transition to gaming state. Further, when the special symbol at the time of stoppage is a small hit symbol (predetermined display result: specifically, for example, “1”, “3”, “5”), the state shifts to the start operation state. In the start operation state, when a game ball wins a specific area provided inside the variable winning ball apparatus 3020, the state shifts to a second big hit game state (a big hit game state started after passing through the start operation state).

  A description will be given of how the gaming machine shown in FIG. 106 proceeds. When the game ball passes through the gate 3032 and the detection signal of the gate switch 3032a is turned on, a lottery is executed by the game control means for controlling the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the lottery result is a win or a miss. Then, normal symbol variation (variable display) is started. In addition, the decorative symbol variation (variable display) is started in synchronization with the normal symbol variation (variable display). When the variation of the normal symbol and the decorative symbol is completed, if it is determined to be a hit, the normal variable winning ball device 3061 is controlled to be in the open state. Then, when the game ball wins the start winning opening and the detection signal of the start opening switch 3060 is turned on, the lottery is executed by the game control means for controlling the progress of the game. In this embodiment, the lottery result is either a big hit or a small hit, and there is no loss. When the result of the lottery is a small hit, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game executes the lottery and determines one of the first small hit, the second small hit or the third small hit.

  Then, the variation (variable display) of the special symbol is started. In addition, the decorative symbol variation (variable display) is started in synchronization with the special symbol variation (in addition, the decorative symbol variation is not started in synchronization with the special symbol variation, and only the special symbol variation is started. A predetermined effect may be executed). When the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, when the big hit is determined, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state (first big hit gaming state). In the big hit gaming state (first big hit gaming state), the big winning opening by the opening / closing plate 3016 is controlled to open and close, for example, 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round has a permissible opening time of 29 seconds). Note that the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation (variable display) of the special symbol is performed in preference to the variation (variable display) of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation (variable display) of the normal symbol. Therefore, for example, even if the variation of the normal symbol is started during the variation of the decorative symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol, the decorative symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol without being synchronized with the variation of the normal symbol. And continue to fluctuate.

  If the small hit is determined, the game control means controls the accessory 3020 to the open state and starts the starting operation. In the starting operation state, the accessory 3020 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time. In the starting operation state, when a game ball wins an accessory 3020, and a game ball wins a specific winning opening 3066A and is detected by the specific area switch 3066a, a V winning is generated. When a V prize is generated, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state (second big hit gaming state). In this jackpot gaming state (second jackpot gaming state), for example, the winning opening by the opening / closing plate 3016 is 3 times (3 rounds, 1 round opening allowance time is 29 seconds), 7 times (7 rounds, 1 round opening allowance) Time is 29 seconds) or 16 times (16 rounds, 1 round opening permissible time is 29 seconds). If no V prize is generated, the game does not enter the second big hit gaming state. In other words, it becomes out of place.

  The same control as in the first to third embodiments can also be applied to the gaming machine 3001 as described above.

  1 is a gaming machine that executes games other than the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 (pachinko gaming machine 1), the gaming machine shown in FIG. 90 (pachinko gaming machine 1001), and the gaming machine shown in FIG. 106 (pachinko gaming machine 3001). May be. Specifically, in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1, the game ball has won the first start winning opening 11 or the second starting winning opening 12, and the first start opening switch 11a or the second start opening switch 12a is turned on. Based on this, a big hit lottery is executed. The special symbol variable display 8 executes variable display of the special symbol, and the effect display device 9 executes variable display of the effect symbol. When the result of the big hit lottery is the big win (first big hit), the big win symbol is derived and displayed as the stop symbol of the special symbol and the production symbol, the game shifts to the big hit gaming state, and the first big winning opening (opening / closing plate 16) is predetermined. It is released a number of times. After the big hit game is over, the game state is shifted to the short-time state by the number of times of change of 100 times. When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on while being controlled in the short-time state, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times with a high probability (100% probability may be sufficient). Then, when a game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 15 and the third start opening switch 13a is turned on, the second big winning port (a bonus item, the variable winning ball device 20) may be obtained with a high probability (or a probability of 100%). Is released. When a game ball is won at the second grand prize opening and a game ball is won in the specific area 66 in the second big prize opening, a big win (second big hit) is generated. When the second big hit occurs, the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times. When the second big hit occurs in the short-time state, the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state by the number of changes of 100 times after the end of the second big hit game. When the first big hit occurs in the time-short state, the gaming state is controlled to the short-time state by a small number of fluctuations (for example, 0 times, 5 times, etc.) after the first big hit game is finished. Note that the number of time reductions is not limited to 100. If a big hit occurs in the normal state (for example, the first big hit based on the derivation and display of the big hit symbol as a special symbol), the number of time reductions is 10 times. When a big hit occurs in the state, it may be 100 times. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the jackpot and increase the fun of the game.

  The same control as in the first to third embodiments can be applied to such a gaming machine.

  Furthermore, based on the winning prize at the starting prize opening, the bonus item (corresponding to the second big prize opening) is opened once or twice without changing the special symbol, and the game ball wins the prize, The same control as in the first to third embodiments is also applied to a gaming machine that executes a game that generates a big hit (corresponding to a second big hit) only when a game ball wins a specific area in the game and a V win occurs. It is possible to apply.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the “standard value for winning a variable winning ball device (first grand prize opening or second big winning gate)” means that a winning is made when the variable winning ball device is opened. Refers to the expected standard (average) number of winnings. For example, if 10 game balls win during a round and the game moves to the next round, the standard value is 10 times the number of rounds.

  In the first to third embodiments, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. A circuit to be mounted may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  The present invention includes a variable winning ball device that is controlled to a starting operation state that is opened according to the establishment of a starting condition, and a game ball is awarded in a special area in the variable winning ball device that is controlled to the starting operation state. This is applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which the variable winning ball apparatus is shifted to a specific gaming state in which the variable winning ball apparatus is controlled to be opened a predetermined number of times.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball apparatus from the front. It is the front view which looked at the variable winning ball apparatus from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the structure which has the passage opening of the game ball provided in the back surface side of the open door. It is a perspective view which shows the path | route from a passage opening to a specific winning opening. It is a perspective view which shows the path | route from other passage openings to a specific winning opening. It is the top view which looked at the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus from the upper side, and the front view seen from the front side. It is the top view which looked at the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus from the upper side, and the front view seen from the front side. It is the top view which looked at the lower part of the variable winning ball apparatus from the upper side. It is the top view which looked at the rotary body from the upper side. It is explanatory drawing which shows arrangement | positioning of each board | substrate attached to the variable winning ball apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of how to advance the game of a gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, and the start of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of a special symbol and a decoration symbol, the start of a small hit game, and the start of a big hit game. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the period of the production | presentation after the end of a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the stop symbol of a special symbol, and the type of winning. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the stop symbol of a special symbol, and a determination value. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between a fluctuation pattern and a determination value. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. FIG. 38E illustrates an effect control command signal line. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit control signal and an INT signal that constitute an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for opening an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows a process during an accessory release. It is a flowchart which shows a process during an accessory release. It is a flowchart which shows a rotary body and a movable part control. It is a timing diagram which shows the operation example of a movable part. It is a timing diagram which shows the operation example of a rotary body. It is a flowchart which shows a post-completion process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial position setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during production. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening opening pre-processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the round which open | releases the 1st big winning opening in the 2nd big hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows the process after closing of the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in the microcomputer for game control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in the microcomputer for game control. It is a block diagram which shows the various signals output to an information terminal board. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of the start port 1 signal. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of the start port 2 signal. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of the start port 2 signal. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of a symbol determination frequency signal. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of 1 signal of big hits. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of 2 signals of big hits. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of V signal. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of an accessory count signal. It is a wave form diagram which shows the output timing of an abnormal signal. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the information output process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a prize information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormal winning notification process. It is a flowchart which shows an abnormal winning notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for production control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display screen of an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect in a small hit game. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a small hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect after a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process after a small hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the alerting | reporting screen displayed on an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control processing. It is a flowchart which shows alerting | reporting control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the situation of the display effect in an effect display apparatus, and the sound effect by a speaker. 10 is a flowchart showing notification control processing in the second embodiment. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine in Embodiment 3 from the front. 10 is a flowchart showing special symbol process processing in the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating start port switch passage processing according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating start port switch passage processing according to the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance specific area | region and a preservation | save area | region. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the common pending | holding memory number buffer with which a 1st pending memory number and a 2nd pending memory number are provided in common. 10 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing in the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the display state of a total pending storage display area. 14 is a flowchart showing a hold storage display control process in the third embodiment. 14 is a flowchart showing a hold storage display control process in the third embodiment. 14 is a flowchart showing a hold storage display control process in the third embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows a 1st extraction prevention sensor circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the 2nd extraction prevention sensor circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the 3rd extraction prevention sensor circuit. It is a front view which shows the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of Embodiment 1. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a modification of the relationship between the stop symbol of the special symbol and the determination value according to the first embodiment. It is the front view which looked at the other pachinko gaming machine from the front.

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Special symbol display 9 Production display device 10 Normal symbol display 11 1st start winning opening 12 2nd starting winning opening 13 3rd starting winning opening 11a 1st starting opening switch 12a 2nd starting opening switch 13a 1st 3 Start switch 15 Variable winning ball device 16 Opening / closing plate 20 Accessory (variable winning ball device)
22 V winning switch 23 Count switch 31 Main board 56 CPU
66 Special winning opening 66a Specific area switch 71, 72, 73 Passing port 71a First winning combination winning switch 72a Second winning winning combination switch 73a Third winning winning combination switch 77, 78 Movable members 77A, 77B Movable part 80 Production control board 85a Accessory discharging switch 86 Rotating body 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (10)

A gaming machine capable of performing a predetermined game using a game ball and shifting to a state advantageous to a player based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition,
A first variable winning ball apparatus capable of changing between a closed state in which a game ball does not win and an open state in which the game ball can win based on the establishment of the first transition condition;
A second variable winning ball apparatus capable of changing between a closed state in which a game ball does not win and an open state in which the game ball can win based on establishment of a second transition condition;
When the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device performs an opening operation, an abnormal winning is given to the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device that executes the opening operation. Threshold storage means for storing a threshold used for notification;
First detection means for detecting a game ball won in the first variable winning ball device and outputting a first detection signal;
Second detection means for detecting a game ball won in the second variable winning ball device and outputting a second detection signal;
A first winning that measures the number of winnings to the first variable winning ball apparatus based on the output of the first detection signal from the first detecting means during the opening operation of the first variable winning ball apparatus. Number measuring means;
A second winning that measures the number of winnings to the second variable winning ball device based on the output of the second detection signal from the second detection means during the opening operation of the second variable winning ball device. Number measuring means;
The first detection signal or the second detection signal from the first detection means or the second detection means in a normal gaming state in which neither the first variable winning ball apparatus or the second variable winning ball apparatus is performing an opening operation. A normal abnormal winning determination means for determining an abnormal winning based on the output of the detection signal;
During execution of the opening operation of the first variable winning ball apparatus, the number of winnings measured by the first winning number measuring means is a first threshold value used for notifying an abnormal winning to the first variable winning ball apparatus. The number of winnings measured by the second winning number measuring means during execution of the opening operation of the second variable winning ball device is used to notify an abnormal winning to the second variable winning ball device. Specific abnormal winning determination means for determining an abnormal winning based on exceeding the second threshold value,
An abnormality notification execution means for executing an abnormality notification when the normal abnormality winning determination means or the specific abnormal winning determination means determines an abnormal winning;
The threshold value storage means stores the first threshold value, which is a value greater than a standard value for winning the first variable winning ball device in the opening operation of the first variable winning ball device, and the second variable winning ball. A gaming machine, wherein the second threshold value, which is a value larger than a standard value for winning a prize to the second variable winning ball device in the opening operation of the device and different from the first threshold value, is stored. An abnormal state determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined abnormal state different from the abnormal winning occurs in the gaming machine;
An external device provided outside the gaming machine based on the determination that an abnormal winning has occurred by the abnormal winning determination means or that the predetermined abnormal state has been determined by the abnormal state determination means And an external output means for outputting a predetermined abnormality signal,
The external output means is provided in the gaming machine when the abnormal winning determination means determines that an abnormal winning has occurred and when the abnormal condition determining means determines that a predetermined abnormal condition has occurred. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined abnormality signal can be output to a common output terminal. A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous for a player based on the winning of a game ball in a special area among the winning areas provided in the second variable winning ball apparatus,
A second variable winning ball apparatus control means for executing control to change the second variable winning ball apparatus between a closed state and an open state during the opening operation of the second variable winning ball apparatus;
The second variable winning ball apparatus control means sets the second variable winning ball apparatus to a closed state and an open state based on an opening pattern according to the type of the established second transition condition among a plurality of types of opening patterns. And change
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the threshold value storage means stores a second threshold value that differs according to the opening pattern. First variable display means for starting the variable display of the first identification information based on the satisfaction of the variable display start condition after the first execution condition of the variable display is satisfied, and deriving and displaying the display result;
Second variable display means for starting the variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the variable display start condition after the second execution condition of the variable display is satisfied, and for deriving and displaying the display result;
Display result determining means for determining display results of the first variable display means and the second variable display means based on the establishment of the variable display start condition;
Starting operation control means for controlling the second variable winning ball apparatus to a starting operation state in which the second variable winning ball apparatus is opened a predetermined number of times when the opening display result is derived and displayed on the first variable display means or the second variable winning ball apparatus; With
The starting operation control means includes
When the first opening display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the first identification information on the first variable display means, the second variable winning ball apparatus shifts to the first starting operation state in which the opening state is a predetermined number of times. First starting operation control means;
When the second opening display result is derived and displayed on the second variable display means as the display result of the second identification information, a second start operation state that is more advantageous to the player than the first start operation state is entered. The game machine according to claim 3, further comprising: 2 starting operation control means. The threshold storage means stores a threshold used for notifying an abnormal winning to the first variable winning ball device or the second variable winning ball device in the normal gaming state,
The number-of-wins counting means is configured to output the first variable winning ball apparatus or the second based on the output of the first detection signal or the second detection signal from the first detection means or the second detection means even in the normal gaming state. Measure the number of winnings to the variable winning ball device,
The normal abnormal winning determination means notifies the abnormal winning to the first variable winning ball apparatus or the second variable winning ball apparatus in the normal gaming state when the number of winnings measured by the winning number measuring means in the normal gaming state. Based on the fact that the threshold used for the game was exceeded,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the threshold storage unit stores a threshold in the specific gaming state and a threshold in the normal gaming state in a common area of the storage unit. The abnormality notification execution means executes the abnormality notification in a common mode between the case where the abnormal winning determination is determined by the normal abnormality winning determination means and the case where the abnormal winning determination is determined by the specific abnormality winning determination means. 5. The gaming machine according to any one of 5. The abnormality notification execution means executes abnormality notification in a different manner depending on whether or not the abnormal abnormality winning determination means determines that there is an abnormal winning and the specific abnormal winning determination means determines that it is an abnormal winning. A gaming machine according to any one of the above. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the threshold value in the normal gaming state is at least 2 or more. First variable display means for starting the variable display of the first identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of the first execution condition of the variable display and deriving and displaying the display result; and the second execution condition of the variable display A gaming machine comprising second variable display means for starting variable display of second identification information that can identify each based on the establishment and deriving and displaying a display result,
Game control information output means for outputting control information generated during execution of the game control process for controlling the progress of the game to an external device provided outside the gaming machine,
The game control information output means outputs first execution condition establishment information indicating that the first execution condition is established to the external device when the first execution condition is established, and the second execution condition is established. Execution condition establishment information output means for outputting, to the external device, second execution condition establishment information indicating that the second execution condition is established,
When the first execution condition and the second execution condition are satisfied within a predetermined period, the execution condition satisfaction information output means outputs execution condition establishment information based on the satisfaction of one execution condition and The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein execution condition establishment information based on establishment of the other execution condition is output after a set period has elapsed. First variable display means for starting the variable display of the first identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of the first execution condition of the variable display and deriving and displaying the display result; and the second execution condition of the variable display A gaming machine comprising second variable display means for starting variable display of second identification information that can identify each based on the establishment and deriving and displaying a display result,
Based on the establishment of the first execution condition or the second execution condition, the establishment identification command indicating which execution condition is established is transmitted, and the first execution condition or the second execution condition is established. Specific command transmission means for transmitting a specific command capable of specifying
An established number display means for recognizing the established number of the first execution condition and the second execution condition based on the established identification command and the specified command transmitted by the specific command transmitting means;
The establishment number display means that the first execution condition or the second execution condition is established in a predetermined display mode when the specific command is received without receiving the establishment identification command from the specific command transmission means. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the number of fulfillment of the first execution condition and the second execution condition is displayed in a recognizable manner.

Images